JP7123358B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with various members that change the behavior of a game ball flowing down a game area. One example is a variable ball entry device that can be opened and closed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325811

Here, in gaming machines, it is desired to devise ways to increase the degree of attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing attention to games.

The present invention
A ball entry means provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area;
It is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter or can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state or cannot be entered. variable entrance means;
updating means capable of updating predetermined numerical information at predetermined intervals;
an operation means capable of executing a predetermined operation that changes the behavior of a predetermined game ball entered by the variable ball entry means;
with
The updating means is configured to start updating at a predetermined timing after the game machine is powered on,
When the predetermined numerical information is specific numerical information, the operation means can be operated in a specific manner as the predetermined operation,
The operation means operates in the specific mode, which is advantageous for the player,
Equipped with first control means and second control means for executing predetermined control,
The first control means is
determining means for performing a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, variable ball entry control is executed to switch the game state from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. a transition means for transitioning to a specific state;
A first change for executing a change display by a first notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and ending the change display by the first notification means as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. display means;
a first determination means for determining the content of the change display when the change display is performed by the first change display means;
means for outputting change display information including content of the change display to the second control means;
with
The second control means is
A second change for executing a change display by the second notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and ending the change display by the second notification means as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. display means;
specific result information corresponding to a specific result specified based on the predetermined numerical information before the state of the predetermined operation by the operating means in the specific state is shifted to the specific state; and the change display information. and a second determining means capable of determining the contents of the change display in the second reporting means;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, attention to games can be improved.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which decompose|disassembles and shows a accessory apparatus. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded rotator unit that constitutes the accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotary body unit. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a right/wrong table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process; It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing. (a) is a flow chart showing a process for transitioning to the high probability mode, and (b) is a flow chart showing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is a flow chart showing a first role product control process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a second role product control process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is an explanatory view for explaining an operation cycle of the 1st distribution member and the 2nd distribution member. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a production|presentation control apparatus and a display control apparatus. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a reserved storage area; It is a flow chart which shows various processing for production performed by MPU of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display control process; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for starting fluctuation. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable display time table; It is a flowchart which shows the design decision processing for big hits. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a first distribution member; It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 2nd distribution member. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing mode of the accessory device in the opening/closing execution mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining winning timings when the variable display time is 60 seconds; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning timing when the variable display time is 30 seconds; It is a flow chart showing the first role product control process in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing rotating body control processing executed by the MPU of the main controller in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a first distribution member; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of a hold notice in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows confirmation processing for suspension. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for reservation control. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information grasping process. 9 is a flow chart showing shift processing for correspondence; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suspension notice processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design decision processing. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a first distribution member; It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 2nd distribution member. It is a flow chart which shows processing for design notice. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for an opening/closing execution mode; It is a flowchart which shows a pattern correction process. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for a first distribution member; It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 2nd distribution member. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the opening/closing execution mode process, and (c) to (e) are the opening/closing execution mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an inside display mode. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time for big hits. (a) is a flow chart showing the processing for the first distribution member, (b) is a flow chart showing the processing for the second distribution member, and (c) is the operation timing of each distribution member and the opening/closing execution mode. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship with opening/closing timing; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an opening period in a modification of the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board in the eighth embodiment; (a) is a longitudinal sectional view seen from the side of the variable winning device, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view seen from the rear side of the variable winning device. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing processing. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variable display time table in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command setting processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for reservation control. It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information grasping process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for design notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline|summary of promotion alerting|reporting. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of demotion notification; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the V winning rate changes due to changes in the number of pending games. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the V winning rate changes due to changes in the number of pending games. FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing opening/closing processing in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the V winning rate changes due to the winning of the upper limit winning number. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the V winning rate changes due to the winning of the upper limit winning number. FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing V possibility determination processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing processing for transition to a high probability mode.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area PE from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed.

The game area PE is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 , and a game area PE is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 . In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guiding rail for the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 when the player rotates the shooting handle 60. is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail.

The guide rail is formed on one side of the play area PE so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the play area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail is provided on the left side of the game area PE.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the area of the game board 24 that is defined as the game area PE by router processing. Each opening includes a general prize-winning port 31, an upper operating port (first ball-entering portion) 33, a lower operating port (second ball-entering portion) 34, a accessory device 150, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a main display. A part 43 and a character object display part 44 are provided respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, the through gate 35, and the accessory device 150, the corresponding detection sensors (general winning sensor 31a, upper winning sensor) are detected. 33a, bottom winning sensor 34c, through winning sensor 35a, entrance sensor 179, see FIG. 6, FIG. 9, etc.). Then, when a prize is awarded to the general winning port 31, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34 and the accessory device 150, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 33, three prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 34, two prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number may be the same. Also, the number of prize balls associated with the accessory device 150 may be less than the number of prize balls associated with the operation ports 33 and 34, or may be the same as the number of prize balls associated with both the operation ports 33 and 34. However, in order to maintain the superiority of winning the prize in the role product device 150, it is preferable that the number of prize balls associated with the role product device 150 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the operation ports 33 and . In addition, the number of prize balls associated with the general winning hole 31 may be equal to or greater than the number of prize balls associated with the accessory device 150 . As will be described later, the general prize-winning port 31 is a ball-entering portion that is not related to a game in which a jackpot lottery is performed, which is the core of the game, or a game during a jackpot. can be said to play an auxiliary role in performing this core game. In that respect, the larger the number of prize balls related to the general prize winning port 31 (or the more likely it is that the general prize winning port 31 is configured to win a prize), the more likely it is that the number of balls held will decrease when performing a game or the like in which a jackpot lottery is performed. It is possible to reduce the number of balls or increase the number of prize balls obtained in total.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 37.例文帳に追加The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 38 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down without being stopped. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, the through gate 35 or the accessory device 150 The entry of a game ball is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a plurality of areas where game balls can flow down are divided.

Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

When the player rotates the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than a predetermined rotation amount and less than a reference rotation amount as the first shooting operation, the horizontal direction in the upper region PE1 A game ball begins to flow down on the left side of the central position. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4. On the other hand, as a second shooting operation, the player rotates the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 60 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. A game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the reference rotation amount is the amount of rotation at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left area PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right area PE3 are the same. With respect to the amount, the proportion of game balls flowing down the left region PE2 increases, and with the amount of rotation operation in the second range, the proportion of game balls flowing down the right region PE3 increases. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball may flow down the right region PE3 at a rotation operation amount close to the reference rotation amount in the rotation operation amount in the first range, and the rotation operation amount in the second range is close to the reference rotation amount. With the amount of rotation operation, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow down the left region PE2.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, the two working ports 33 and 34 are arranged vertically so that the upper working port 33 faces upward. The lower operation port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 34, and the electric accessory 34a becomes the open state (supported state or guide state), thereby lowering the operation opening. It is possible to win a prize to 34.

The upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 are installed in the lower region PE4 of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. In this case, the upper operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36a formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game flowed onto the stage 36a through a guide passage (not shown) formed in the variable display unit 36. A game ball discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 easily enters the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34.例文帳に追加

By the way, the entrance of the guide passage that enables guidance of the game ball to the stage 36a is located at a position corresponding to the boundary between the upper area PE1 and the left area PE2 in the variable display unit 36 (the first holding light emitting unit in FIG. 4). 45) and is not formed elsewhere.

By providing the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 in the lower region PE4 as described above, when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2 and the right region PE3 Winning to the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34 is possible in any case where the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down. However, since the entrance portion of the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided for the left side region PE2 and not provided for the right side region PE3, it is better to flow down the left side region PE2 than to flow down the right side region PE3. Winning to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is likely to occur as compared with the case. Also, regarding the arrangement of the game parts and nails 38 in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, there are more winnings to the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34 when flowing down the left side area PE2 than in the case of flowing down the right side area PE3. It is designed to occur easily.

In addition, it is not limited to this, and may be configured such that only the game ball that has flowed down the left side area PE2 can enter the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34. FIG.

The accessory device 150 is provided with an opening/closing accessory 168 as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (closed state, first state) of the opening and closing accessory 168, the game ball cannot or hardly wins the prize in the accessory device 150, and the opening and closing accessory 168 is in the open state (open state, second state). , it is possible to win a prize for the accessory device 150 . The accessory device 150 will be described later in detail.

The game ball of the opening/closing accessory 168 is normally in the closed state, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state), the game ball is switched to the open state. . Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As for the manner in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened, the opening/closing accessory 168 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit, with the lapse of a predetermined time (eg 5 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg 10) as one round. There is a mode to be done.

The accessory device 150 is installed in the right area PE3 of the game board 24 . As a result, winning to the accessory device 150 is possible only when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right area PE3. The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are arranged downstream of the position where the accessory device 150 is arranged. In other words, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 (especially the lower working port 34) are not arranged upstream of the accessory device 150. FIG. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is opened, the winning of the accessory device 150 is hindered by winning the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. occurrence is avoided.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 43 and a character object display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. It should be noted that, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general prize winning openings 31 described above is installed in a state of being open upward.

The main display part 43 has a round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered by winning the jackpot (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered), A first result display part AS for indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the upper working port 33 and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning to the lower working port 34 are clearly indicated. A second result display section BS is set for the purpose.

In the round display section RS, display of the number of rounds starts when the opening/closing execution mode starts, and the display ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the first result display portion AS, the winning to the upper working port 33 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display part AS and the variable display is performed. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second result display section BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower working opening 34, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 34 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display part BS displays a predetermined stop result and fluctuating display. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the corresponding result display units AS, BS start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display section, the variable display is started in the single result display section, and the game cycle is continued until the variable display is stopped while a predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

The character item display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the character object display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 44 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation opening 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the main display unit 43 and character object display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, they are not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. good too.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. A center frame 42 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41 . The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the pattern display device 41, and the configuration is such that the visibility of the display screen is not lowered due to the game ball falling. .

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 41, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 . That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 43, the variable display is performed on the pattern display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is opened, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined effective line. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

A first holding light emitting section 45 corresponding to the first result display section AS and the pattern display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the upper operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first reservation light emitting part 45.例文帳に追加A second holding light emitting section 46 corresponding to the second result display section BS and the pattern display device 41 is provided on the upper right portion of the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the lower operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second reservation light emitting part 46.例文帳に追加As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding light-emitting unit 45 and the second holding light-emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling game balls. ing.

A third holding light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided at the lower portion of the center frame 42 . The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the third reservation light emitting part 47.例文帳に追加Note that each of the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the pattern display device 41, or the like.

The accessory device 150 shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by winning a jackpot by a winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into one of the operation ports 33 and 34, and the role is played. A game ball can enter the object device 150 . When a game ball enters the accessory device 150, it is detected by an entrance sensor 179, and prize balls are paid out. Also, when a game ball entering the accessory device 150 enters a V winning slot provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later. A high probability mode is set between a high probability mode advantageous to the player and a low probability mode disadvantageous to the player. Although the details of the lottery mode will be described later, setting to the high probability mode makes it easier to win the jackpot, and setting to the low probability mode makes it harder to win the jackpot. That is, when the high-probability mode is set, it is easy to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and when the low-probability mode is set, it is difficult to shift to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5(a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5(b) is a plan view showing a simplified configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180. FIG.

The role product device 150 is roughly composed of a role product unit 160 and a rotator unit 180 . As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is fixed to the game board 24 with screws. The base frame 161 is vertically partitioned by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed with an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . A pair of opening/closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 is provided on both left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161 . A passage forming member 171 and a driving portion fixing plate 172 are provided on the back side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening/closing accessory driving portions 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back of the driving portion fixing plate 172. there is One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive portion fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening and closing accessory driving portion 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening and closing accessory 168. Concatenated. Therefore, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening/closing accessory driving section 173 .

To explain the opening operation in detail, each opening and closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited), and each tip approaches the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening/closing accessory 168 opens outward, and between the tip of each opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167, there is a game ball. A gap larger than one can be created. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each openable accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in an open state. Even when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening and closing accessory 168 stands up), when the opening and closing accessory drive unit 173 is driven (excited) (When the opening and closing accessory 168 is open to the outside). It may be configured so that it can enter the object device 150 . For example, when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is A configuration in which the same gap becomes larger when driven is conceivable.

In addition, the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is configured such that it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the game machine by the passage forming member 171 and the drive section fixing plate 172, and the back side of the opening/closing accessory drive section 173 is covered by the cover member 174. there is

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161 . An extending wall 175a formed in the upper part of the front frame 175 extends upward from the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 is forwardly moved by the extending wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163. Further, a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the far side of the passage plate 177 (Fig. 5(b)). The passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and the width of the passage plate 177 is narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 It is guided to passageway 178 . The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. - 特許庁An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178 , and the game ball entering the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179 . As a result, entry of a game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is configured by a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotator unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be positioned below the passage forming member 171 . The rotor unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191, as shown in FIG.

The guiding passage forming member 181 is formed with a concave portion 182 which is recessed downward at substantially the center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper opening of the recess 182 . The guide passage 183 is bilaterally symmetrical and slopes down from the center of the back side toward the center of the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is positioned at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 . The center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is positioned vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160 . A passage wall 183a forming the innermost center of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage walls 183a, and a horizontally extending passage cover 184 is formed above the inner guide passage 183. . However, an entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and in a plan view (see FIG. 8), the inner portion of the guide passage 183 is configured such that only the center of the inner portion is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184 a overlaps the exit of the game ball passage 178 , the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reliably reaches the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. The ball distribution portion 185 has an inclined surface that slopes downward from its center toward both the left and right sides. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the guide passage 183 are sorted to either the left or the right. Then, it rolls along the slope of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the near side of the guide passage 183 . A lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the recess 182 is formed on the front side of the guide passage 183 .

A V-winning opening 182a is formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion 182 . The V winning opening 182a communicates with the V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, a V winning path 191a is provided with a V winning path 192, and a game ball passing through the V winning path 191a is detected by the V winning path 192. FIG.

A side surface of the concave portion 182 is formed with an outlet 182b. The exit 182b communicates with a discharge passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the exit 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the discharge passage 191b. In this case, a sensor 193 for removal is provided in the passage 191b for removal, and a game ball passing through the passage 191b for removal is detected by the sensor 193 for removal. Note that the V winning sensor 192 and the missing sensor 193 are configured by well-known proximity sensors. In addition, game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the exit passage 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown).

A rotating body driving portion 194 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below. passes through. A rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. Note that the rotor drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the recessed portion 182 of the guide passage forming member 181 and is positioned within the recessed portion 182 . Then, the rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise as the rotating body driving section 194 is driven. Ten inwardly recessed ball guide portions 202 are formed on the outer periphery of the rotor 201, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at regular intervals. Of these, nine ball guide portions 202 are bottomed outlet guide portions 203 , and one ball guide portion 202 is bottomless V winning port guide portion 204 . The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to become lower toward the outside. Each ball guide portion 202 is large enough to accommodate one game ball, and a game ball drawn out from the lead-out portion 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide portions 202 . In this case, the game ball entering the V winning opening guiding portion 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the outlet passage 191b through the outlet 182b.

Further, in this embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to detect the rotational position of the rotor 201 . The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other with a predetermined interval. A light-receiving element is arranged at a position facing each other. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on a sensor substrate 197, and the sensor substrate 197 is provided between both arm portions 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). It is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so that a cut bang 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is positioned.

The cut bang 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut bang 198, and only when the notch 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates, light from the light emitting element is emitted. of light reaches the light receiving element. A notch portion 198a is formed in correspondence with the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, so that it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element has detected the light from the light emitting element. , the rotational position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between the arms 196a and 196b.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on one of the left and right guide passages 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183 on which the outlet 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is disposed above the outlet 182 b of the guide passage 183 as a bottom portion that constitutes part of the floor of the guide passage 183 . The first distribution member 300 is arranged on the back side of the outlet 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to a first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled so that the floor of the guide passage 183 and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 rotates downward about the rotation axis and slopes downward toward the outlet 182b. .

With the above configuration, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, the guide passage 183 is moved to the left. The distributed game balls pass over the first distribution member 300 using the first distribution member 300 as a floor portion and reach one of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201 . On the other hand, the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (excited), and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 tilts toward the lower outlet 182b. , the game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is guided to the exit 182b (path 191b for exit) as it is without reaching the rotating body 201. Therefore, the V winning probability (the probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300. FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a warp passage 250 is provided for guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 directly to the V winning passage 191a. The warp path 250 has a passage area 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage area 251 is formed by curving backward and downward. More specifically, the passage wall 183a behind the ball distribution portion 185 in the guide passage 183 is formed with an opening (not shown) that opens toward the rear, and the passage area 251 is formed in the opening. The inlet portion 252 is communicated. In addition, on the upper side of the discharge passage forming member 191, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass toward the V winning passage 191a is formed. The exit portion 253 of the passage area 251 in the passage 250 is communicated. The V-guiding passage 260 is formed so as to slope downward toward the V-winning passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V-guiding passage 260 communicates with the V-winning passage 191a.

With the above configuration, when a game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is guided toward the warp passage 250 , it passes through the passage area 251 in the warp passage 250 and is led out to the V guide passage 260 . Then, the game ball passes through the V guiding path 260, enters the V winning path 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, in the upstream (forward) of the entrance portion 252 of the warp passage 250, the inflow of game balls into the warp passage 250 is regulated (distribution to the warp passage 250 or distribution to the left and right in the guide passage 183 is controlled. a second distribution member 310 is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution drive section 310a (electromagnetic solenoid). It is displaced between a non-distribution state in which it is arranged in front and a distribution state in which it is arranged above it and is not arranged in front of the inlet portion 252 . That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not excited) and is in the non-distribution state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250, and the guide passage 183 Distributed left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven (excited state) and is in the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the warp passage 250 (rear). It is led directly to the V winning path 191a in no time. That is, the V winning probability (the probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the second distribution member 310. FIG.

In addition, the ball distribution part 185 in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 has a rearward descending surface so that the game balls can be distributed not only to the left and right but also to the rear. However, when the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributing state, the second distributing member 310 is arranged on the above-mentioned downwardly inclined surface, and although it is in the non-distributing state In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the game ball is about to be distributed to the side of the downward slope and the game ball stays there.

In this embodiment, the period until the winning game ball 150 reaches the position (ball sorting section 185) to be sorted by the second sorting member 310 is about 0.3 sec. The passage length is set so that Also, the period until the winning game ball of the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 (on the first distribution member 300) is about 0.5 sec. The path length is set to .

The game ball entering the accessory device 150 described above rolls on the ball receiving plate 163 to enter the game ball passage 178 . In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179 . A game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 reaches a ball sorting portion 185 formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the far side. Then, on condition that the second distribution member 310 arranged in the ball distribution portion 185 is in a non-distribution state, the balls are distributed to either the left or right guide passage 183 . Then, it is guided to the lead-out portion 186 by rolling along the guide passage 183 on the sorted side. The game ball guided to the lead-out portion 186 rolls along the slope of the lead-out portion 186 and is led out into the concave portion 182 . However, when distributed to the left side in the ball distributing portion 185, the first distributing member 300 must be in a non-distributing state to lead out to the concave portion 182 side. In other words, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recess 182 side, or may be led out to the exit 182b as it is.

Inside the recess 182, the rotating body 201 always rotates at a constant speed, and the game ball drawn into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide section 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the missing sensor 193 . On the other hand, the game ball drawn into the concave portion 182 and entering the V winning opening guiding portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192 . Then, when it is detected by the V prize sensor 192, the win/fail lottery mode is shifted.

When the game ball reaches the ball distribution portion 185, if the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball can be sent not only to the left or right guide passage 183 but also to the warp passage 250 side. are distributed. By being distributed to the warp path 250 side, it is directly detected by the V prize sensor 192 without being distributed by the first distribution member 300 or the rotating body 201, and the transition to the lottery mode is performed.

Since only one of the ten ball guides 202 has the V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that enters the concave portion 182 of the accessory device 150 has a probability of 1/10 reaching the V winning opening 182a. will enter. In addition, when game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the sensor 193 for losing, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 71 . Furthermore, the movement of the game ball on the rotating body unit 180 is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161 .

However, the number of ball guide portions 202 and the number of V winning opening guide portions 204 are not limited to those described above. A configuration may be adopted in which V prizes are awarded with a probability of /6, or a configuration in which V prizes are awarded with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc. and the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. 199. These signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device which will be described later. However, it is good also as a structure which performs these part or all in the production|presentation control-apparatus side mentioned later which is a sub-side control apparatus.

Here, as already explained, when a jackpot win is won in the lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning to the accessory device 150 is allowed. . Then, when a winning to the accessory device 150 occurs, 15 prize balls are paid out for one winning (winning of one game ball). In other words, it can be said that the player can obtain many benefits just by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode wins the V winning opening 182a, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the high probability mode. On the other hand, if the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode does not enter the V winning opening 182a, that is, if any game ball enters the exit opening 182b, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Switch to low probability mode. In the high-probability mode, it is easy to shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and in the low-probability mode, it is difficult to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, during the open/close execution mode, not only winning to the accessory device 150 but also how to win to the V winning opening 182a is the key to the game.

Here, the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is notified by the variable display on the main display section 43 or the effect (game round effect) by the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, the shift to the high-probability mode is notified by the occurrence of winning to the V winning opening 182a. Therefore, there is a difference in timing between notification of transition to the opening/closing execution mode and notification of transition to the high-probability mode. More specifically, the notification of the shift to the high-probability mode occurs after the presentation of the game round.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 201 does not rotate at least during the opening/closing execution mode, and the V winning hole guide portion 204 is stopped at a position corresponding to the lead-out portion 186 . Therefore, the game ball that has reached the lead-out portion 186 always enters the V winning opening 182a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball sorting section 185 is provided with a restricting section (not shown) so that the game ball is not guided to the right guiding passage 183 of the left and right guiding passages 183 . In other words, when a game ball entering the accessory device 150 reaches the ball sorting section 185, the game ball is sent to the first sorting member 300 on the condition that the second sorting member 310 is in a non-sorting state. is guided to the guide passage 183 on the side where the first distribution member 300 is provided rather than the guide passage 183 on the side where the is not provided. Then, when the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, it is drawn out to the lead-out portion 186 and enters the V winning opening 182a. On the other hand, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the prize is won through the exit 182b.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing accessory 168 is opened and closed by shifting to the opening and closing execution mode. Regardless, switching between the distribution state and the non-distribution state is performed at a predetermined operating cycle after the power is turned on. This configuration will be described later in detail.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, as shown in FIG. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The controller assembly unit 93 comprises a payout controller 97 and a power supply and launch controller 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . The various sensors include a general winning port 31, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a general winning sensor 31a for detecting a winning to the accessory device 150, an upper winning sensor 33a, a lower winning sensor 34c, a through A winning sensor 35a, an entrance sensor 179, and the like are provided. Further, various sensors include a V winning sensor 192, a sensor for loss 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. FIG. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 179, 192, 193, and 196, the MPU 112 performs winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering portion, and determines the position of the rotating body 201. Grasping. In addition, the MPU 112 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, and the through gate 35.

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, there are various drive units such as an electric accessory drive unit 34b, an open/close accessory drive unit 173, a first apportionment drive unit 300a, a second apportionment drive unit 310a, a rotor drive unit 194, and the like. is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven and controlled, and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed. Further, in these cases, drive control of both distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, or drive control of the rotor drive unit 194 is performed. As already described, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 201 remains stopped during the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the MPU 112 executes display control of the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS in the main display portion 43, and the main display portion is displayed in the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 32. The display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is specified, the MPU 112 performs display control of the accessory display section 44. FIG.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Through this external output terminal 99, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and jackpot information is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information related to the lottery result such as is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the supplied game ball toward the guide rail, and the game ball is shot by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and shooting control device 98 to the solenoid. be.

Effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, display light emitting portion 63 and speaker portion provided in each holding light emitting portion 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14 64 and controls the display control device 212 .

The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82 . In this case, the performance control device 82 determines, based on the various commands input from the main control device 81, the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , the presence or absence of reach generation and the contents of reach performance are selected by lottery.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen G is designed so that three symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is designed to be

In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a result of the big win.

In this pachinko machine 10, the winning/failing lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode suggests the easiness of setting the high-probability mode depending on the type of combination of symbols for informing the occurrence of a big win result. The main symbols with 3 or 7 out of the odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to the "first specific symbol", and the main symbols with odd numbers other than 3 or 7. corresponds to the "second specific symbol". Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols". Then, in the situation of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be set to the high probability mode, in the order of "first specific symbol", "second specific symbol", and "non-specific symbol". The combination is displayed frozen. That is, the high-probability mode is most likely to be set when the combination of the first specific symbols is stop-displayed, and the low-probability mode is most likely to be set when the combination of non-specific symbols is stop-displayed. A configuration for selecting a symbol will be described later in detail.

In the lower left part of the display screen G, a first reserved display area Ga is set, and in the lower right part of the display screen G, a second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first reservation display area (non-priority side reservation display area) Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the upper operation port 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is divided and displayed as follows. Specifically, the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 4, and correspondingly, the first unit reservation display area Ga1, the second A unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 When the number of pending prizes is 4, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reservation display area (priority side reservation display area) Gb, the same number of unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 34 are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. It is divided and displayed so that it is displayed. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved when the game ball has won the lower operation opening 34 is four, corresponding to the second reserved display area Gb, the first unit reserved display area Gb1, the second A unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 34 is 1, the reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation opening 34. When the number of pending items is four, the pending images are displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, set the display of the main display section 43, set the contents of the effect of the pattern display device 41, set the display of the accessory display section 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for jackpot occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and the pattern display device 41 deviate and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation display time in the main display unit 43 and the pattern display device 41 and CS are used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS, when a prize is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a first result display section reserved area Ra and a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area and a fourth area, respectively. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area → second area → third area → fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of area. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are retained and stored. In addition, the total number of reserved balls storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 114b, and in the total number of reserved numbers storage area, the number of winning histories to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is specified. Information for doing is stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game cycle, the execution area AE is moved. Based on the various numerical information stored in the .

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34.例文帳に追加More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 113a as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the success/failure table includes the success/failure table (low-probability success/failure information group) for the low-probability mode shown in FIG. information group for probability) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode.

As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers for winning are arbitrary. The value group of the counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high-probability mode.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a wrong result except for the value of the random number that wins the jackpot.

It should be noted that a configuration may be provided in which a special loss result, which does not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode or the support mode, is provided as a loss result, which triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the winning/failing lottery mode is switched by the V winning during the opening/closing execution mode. A configuration in which no transition is performed, or a configuration in which a winning device different from the accessory device 150 performs the opening/closing execution mode may be employed.

The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

Random number values for setting the types of jackpot results are stored as a type table (game type information group) in various table storage area 113 d as win/fail information group storage means in ROM 113 .

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the type table, 4R (round) jackpot results, 8R jackpot results, 12R jackpot results, and 16R jackpot results are set as jackpot result types. The 4R jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which round games are executed four times, and the 8R jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which round games are executed eight times. A 12R jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which round games are performed 12 times, and a 16R jackpot result is a jackpot result in which round games are performed 16 times.

Here, the round game means that (1) the open/close accessory 168 is opened for a predetermined opening time (open period), (2) the total winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 is It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions of reaching a predetermined upper limit number is satisfied.

In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to 5 seconds in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to ten.

Here, the opening time of each round will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 60 is operated, game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 at a shooting cycle of 0.6 sec. In this case, the opening time of each round is set to be shorter than the product of the launch period and the upper limit winning number of each round. In other words, the opening time (5 sec) is set to be shorter than 6 sec, which is the product of the firing cycle (0.6 sec) and the maximum winning number (10). Therefore, in the present embodiment, basically, the open time elapses before the winning of the maximum winning number of game balls occurs, and the round ends. In other words, each round is set to end when the opening time elapses rather than ending before the opening time elapses.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and in the game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the final stop result is the award corresponding result. To make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 41 is started in the game machine. means the display state of In addition, concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number attached on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed as a result of the award correspondence.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern strings displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 41, and the remaining patterns are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a row in a variable manner. In addition, in a state where the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform a ready-to-win effect. , after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win pattern, a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform the ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, or only some of the symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3, characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, that is, in game rounds resulting in a big hit. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. is executed.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main control device 81 but by the effect control device 82 . In this case, in the performance control device 82, the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to cause the notice display than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and the notice display with a low appearance rate occurs. A lottery process for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition of being easy to perform. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 112 determines the variation display time on the main display section 43 and the variation display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display section 43 and at the start of the variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 41 .

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance the game will be described. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are read, and the states of these various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 179, 192, 193, and 196 are read. Execute the process of determining and saving the detection information. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected by various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball is detected. Sets the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects that a prize has been won in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 35, the number of stored role-things stored in the power reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 114c. In addition, the production control device 82 executes a process for lighting the third pending light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the number of stored character product pending storage.

After that, in step S105, after executing the prize winning process for the operation port, this timer interrupt process is terminated. In the winning process for the operation opening, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in either of the operation openings 33 and 34, and when it is determined that the game has won, numerical information such as a big hit random number counter C1 at that time is displayed. is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

Concretely, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG.

In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation opening 33 whether or not the game ball has won the upper operation opening 33 (start winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 33. FIG. In step S204, the value stored in the retention number storage area of the first result display section retention area Ra is read, and the starting retention storage number RaN retained and stored in the first result display section retention area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start pending storage number RaN). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS is performed, and the winning process ends.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operation opening 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 34 (start winning) is determined by the lower operation opening 34. Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out two game balls is set in step S207. In subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 34. FIG. In step S209, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is read, and the start-up reservation number RbN reserved and stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start pending storage number RbN). After that, information acquisition processing is performed in step S205, and the main winning processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S201 and step S206, when the game ball does not enter either the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

Incidentally, the prize ball command set in the above step S202 or step S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output processing S401 of the normal processing to be described later.

Here, the information acquisition processing in step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start pending storage set in step S204 or step S209 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). judge. If the starting pending memory number N is equal to the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is. While incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total retention number storage area in step S303 (the sum of the first start retention memory number RaN and the second start retention memory number RbN; hereinafter referred to as the common retention number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the above step S103, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal processing described later are displayed in the corresponding result display unit. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage area of the storage storage area for use, that is, the storage area corresponding to the storage number incremented by one in step S302.

That is, when the start suspension memory number RaN for the upper working port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is set for the upper working port It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reservation area Ra, ie, the reservation area Ra corresponding to the starting reservation storage number RaN for the upper working port incremented by one in step S302.

In addition, when the start suspension memory number RbN for the lower working port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is set for the lower working port. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the reservation area Rb, that is, the start reservation storage number RbN for the lower working port incremented by one in step S302 and the corresponding reservation area Rb.

After executing the process of step S304, confirmation processing for suspension (step S305) and setting processing of a suspension command (step S306 ), and then terminate the information acquisition process. Confirmation processing for suspension is performed at a timing prior to the start of the game round to grasp information on the result of the success/fail judgment when the game round related to the hold information acquired this time is started and the information on the variable display time of the game round. That is, this is the processing performed when the hold information is acquired. Then, output setting is performed to the effect control device 82 to hold commands including the result of the success/failure determination and information about the variable display time. A pending command is output to the effect control device 82 in the normal processing described later. The effect control device 82 controls so that the display of the suspension light emitting units 45 and 46 and the suspension display areas Ga and Gb is changed in response to the increase in the suspension information based on the acquired suspension command. In addition, the result of the determination of the validity of the hold information acquired this time and the effect related to the variable display time are performed at a timing earlier than the result of the determination of the validity in the game round related to the hold information. and control various devices.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S409 and S410 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, determination of winning or not of a big win and allocation of the big win types are performed, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, setting of variable display by the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S403, it progresses to step S404 and executes a game state transition process. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode or the like. Details of the game round control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 34a. A lottery is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

Thereafter, in step S406, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. FIG. The power failure flag is set when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 . Further, in step S410, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S407 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, and therefore the power failure processing from step S411 onwards is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S412, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S413, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control processing of step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG.

In the game round control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 are not executed, and this game is executed. Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

If the open/close execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the main display section 43 is in the variable display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in the process of variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 2114 stores a flag during variable display. The flag during variable display is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not displaying a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S503 to S505. In the game cycle start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the common reservation number CRN is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN for both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are "0". Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is. If the common pending number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb is set for variable display in step S504. , and in step S505, the variation start processing for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S607 is executed, and if the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" executes data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S608 to S613.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". is stored, the data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start holding storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it Thereby, when the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section reservation area corresponding to the lower operation opening 34 is stored. The hold information stored in area Rb is given priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S602, the first start reservation storage number RaN in the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S603, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S606, if the second result display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, it is erased, and if it is not stored, that state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is the start of the current variable display.

In the subsequent step S607, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 113e of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operation port 33 A shift command including information indicating compatibility is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. - 特許庁After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S607 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). In the production control device 82, based on the received shift command, the display in the first reservation light emitting part 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first reservation display area Ga of the pattern display device 41 correspond to the decrease in the number of reservations. and execute the process to change it.

In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S608, the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion holding area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S609, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In the subsequent step S612, if the second result display flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the second result display flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the subsequent step S613, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 113e of the ROM 113, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, the lower working port 34 A shift command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. - 特許庁After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set at step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). In the production control device 82, based on the received shift command, the display in the second reservation light emitting part 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the pattern display device 41 correspond to the decrease in the number of reservations. and execute the process to change it.

Next, fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is stored based on the confirmation of the occurrence of the V winning in the process of shifting to the high-probability mode, which will be described later, and that is erased when any of the jackpot results occur thereafter.

If the mode is not the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode in step S702. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 13(a). determine whether or not there is On the other hand, if it is the high-probability mode, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode in step S703. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 13(b). determine whether or not there is

After the process of step S702 or step S703, in steps S704 to S710, the process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and in the current game round, the first result display unit AS or the first 2, and executes processing for setting the stop result when ending the variable display executed in one of the result display sections BS. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables stored in the various table storage area 113d in the ROM 113 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S702 or step S703 is a big win. It should be noted that the processing of these steps S701 to S704 corresponds to the winning lottery processing in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When the jackpot is won, in steps S705 to S709, the processing for setting the game result and the stop result when the jackpot is won are executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the RAM 114 stores the second result display unit flag. If the second result display section flag is not stored, in step S706 the distribution table for the first result display section (see FIG. 14A) is referred to and the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 4R jackpot results, the numerical range of the 8R jackpot results, the numerical range of the 12R jackpot results, and the numerical range of the 16R jackpot results. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, the distribution table for the second result display section (see FIG. 14B) is referred to in step S707 to make a distribution determination. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numeric range of the 12R jackpot result or the numeric range of the 16R jackpot result.

After the processing of step S706 or step S707, in step S708, in the current game round in which any of the jackpot results will occur, the jackpot result is displayed on the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS. A stop result setting process for a big win is executed for ending the variable display while the corresponding stop result is displayed. Also, in step S709, information for specifying the win/loss determination result and the type determination result of the current game round by the MPU 112 is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. Specifically, in step S709, one of the 4R flag, 8R flag, 12R flag, and 16R flag is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S711.

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a jackpot winning, a negative determination is made in step S704, and the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, in the current game round in which the result is a failure, the stop result corresponding to the failure result is displayed in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS, and the variable display is ended. Execute stop result setting processing. After that, the process proceeds to step S711.

After the processing of step S709 or step S711 is executed, in step S711, the variable display time is set for setting the variable display time of the current game round in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS. Execute the process.

The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is one of the jackpot results. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 2R flag, 4R flag, 8R flag, 12R flag and 16R flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the current game result is a loss result, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 as the occurrence of the reach indication. When identifying the presence or absence of reach generation using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, and the variable display time table for reach generation stored in the variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is referred to for this time. The variable display time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS, etc. is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in subsequent step S804. After that, the setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the result of the win/fail lottery is the result of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, or when the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss result and the lottery for generating the reach is won, the ready-to-win display is executed. It has become.

Here, the reach display is provided with normal reach and super reach, which have different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to normal reach and super reach is set in the variable display time table for reach generation, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is acquired. be. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. A corresponding reach indication is determined. The variable display time table for reach generation will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 113c is referred to in step S805, and the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, the setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the variable display time information at the time of no reach occurrence is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of start pending storage numbers RaN and RbN increases. The variable display time table for reach non-occurrence will be described later in detail.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected. Although the occurrence variable display time table is set, it is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the occurrence of the ready-to-win, and the variable display time to be easily selected and the variable display time to be difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the winning is reached. may be configured. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which individual variable display time tables are set according to the types of jackpot results.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 21), after step S711, the variation command and the type command are set in step S712. The variable command includes information on presence/absence of reach occurrence and information on variable display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, 4R jackpot result information, 8R jackpot result information, 12R jackpot result information, 16R jackpot result information, loss result information, and the like.

The variation command and type command set in step S712 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. be. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the performance control device 82 so that the symbols corresponding to each game round are variably displayed. This processing will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S713, of the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS, the result display portion corresponding to the current round of the game starts to display the changing pattern. In this case, if the second result display section flag is not stored in the RAM 114, it is specified that the result display section corresponding to the current game round is the first result display section AS, and the second result display section flag is set. If it is stored, the second result display section BS is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 19), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progressing process, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 114 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 22), as described above. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the result display section (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to the current game round. , ends this game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S508. In the fluctuation end processing, the information stored in the RAM 114 in the processing of steps S709 and S710 is specified, and the main display section 43 is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display section 43. do.

In the subsequent step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S509 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The performance control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 receives the variation end command to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 in the normal processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 23 to 25 and the like.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS of one game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing at which the variable display ends, it is determined in step S903 whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 4R flag, 8R flag, 12R flag and 16R flag is stored in the RAM 114 . If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S904. In the start process, the rotating body 201 is drive-controlled so as to be arranged at the initial position (the position where the V winning opening guide portion 204 corresponds to the lead-out portion 186). In addition, before starting the opening/closing execution mode, it checks whether the opening/closing accessory 168 is in a closed state, or grasps the current state of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 . In the following step S905, a process of inputting the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed. Specifically, if the 4R flag is stored in the RAM 114, "4" is input to the round counter RC, and if the 8R flag is stored, "8" is input to the round counter RC, and the 12R flag is stored. If so, "12" is input to the round counter RC, and if the 16R flag is stored, "16" is input to the round counter RC. Further, in step S905, round display start processing is executed to notify the type of the current open/close execution mode. In the round display start processing, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 114 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 113, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section RS in the main display section 43 . As a result, information on the round related to the output is displayed on the round display section RS.

Then, in step S906, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting opening the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the processing for setting the opening period, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter TC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 . In this embodiment, the opening time (opening period) is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode, and in step S906, "1250" (5 sec) is input to the timer counter TC as the opening time. The value of the timer counter TC is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is executed.

It should be noted that the opening time may be varied depending on the type of jackpot results. In this case, the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode may be associated with the length of the opening time such that the opening time is lengthened/shortened as the number of rounds performed in the opening/closing execution mode increases. Further, the length of the opening time may be set according to the game state (high or low of the winning lottery mode or the support mode) at the time of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the opening time may be shorter in the opening/closing execution mode shifted to the high-probability mode than in the opening/closing execution mode shifted to the low-probability mode, or vice versa. Further, the opening time may be shorter in the opening/closing execution mode shifted to the high-frequency support mode than in the opening/closing execution mode shifted to the low-frequency support mode, or vice versa. By shortening the opening time in situations where the opening/closing execution mode is likely to continue (high-probability mode or high-frequency support mode), the opening/closing accessory 168 does not start opening even though the opening/closing execution mode has been entered. It is possible to reduce the feeling of sluggishness.

After executing the opening period setting process in step S906, an opening command is set in step S908. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed.

In the subsequent step S908, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the output terminal of the external output terminal 99 made into an output state according to a jackpot result (type of opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, when the 16R flag is stored in the RAM 114, the state of the output terminal for the first jackpot is set to the output state. Further, when a flag indicating a jackpot result other than the 16R flag is stored, the state of the output terminal for the second jackpot may be set to the output state. In this way, the management control device of the gaming hall can grasp the occurrence of the big win and the type of the result of the big win.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S901, and the process proceeds to step S909. In step S909, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for opening has passed, the opening/closing process is executed in step S910. Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 . If the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" at step S1002, and whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0" at step S1003. judge.

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or if the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process advances to step S1004, and the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 opens the opening/closing accessory 168. is in the driving state.

In the subsequent step S1005, processing for setting an open period for each round is performed. In the process of setting the open period of each round, the process of inputting "1250" (5 sec) corresponding to the open time (open period) to the timer counter TC is performed.

In the subsequent step S1006, a process for setting the upper limit winning number of each round is performed. In the processing for setting the upper limit number of prizes to be won for each round, the process of inputting "10" corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to the prize counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received open command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Also, when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state at step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1008 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined by the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150 in step S1009. If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S1010, and then it is determined in step S1011 whether or not the value of the prize counter PC is "0". If not, the main opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TC is "0" in step S1008 and the opening time has passed, or if the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1011 and the maximum winning number has been won, It means that the conditions for ending the round have been met. In such a case, in order to close the accessory device 150 in step S1012, the opening/closing accessory drive unit 173 is brought into a non-driving state.

In the subsequent step S1013, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1, and in step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", in step S1015, an interval is set as a waiting time between rounds, that is, from the open state to the closed state until the opening state is opened again. setting process. In the interval setting process, a process of inputting "375" (1.5 sec) corresponding to the interval to the timer counter TC is performed.

Then, in step S1016, a closing command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the interval of the round game based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the display corresponding to the interval of the round game (for example, moving image display) is performed.

If it is determined in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", ending processing is executed in step S1017. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the timer counter TC is set with waiting time information for the ending pre-stored in the ROM 113 . In this embodiment, the waiting time for ending is set to be 5 seconds, and in step S1017, a process of inputting "1250" to the timer counter TC is performed.

After that, in step S1018, after setting the ending command, the opening/closing process ends. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that the display corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed. .

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after the opening/closing process is executed in step S910, the process for transition to the high probability mode is executed in step S911.

In the processing for shifting to the high-probability mode, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25(a), in step S1101, it is determined by the detection state of the V winning sensor 192 whether or not the winning to the V winning opening 182a has occurred. . If no winning to the V winning opening 182a has occurred, the shift processing is terminated as it is. If a prize has been won in the V winning opening 182a, in step S1102, a process of storing a high-probability mode transition flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is executed, and then this transition process is terminated. do. The high-probability mode transition flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify that the V winning opening 182a has won at least once during the open/close execution mode.

After executing the processing for transitioning to the high probability mode in step S911, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S912, and the waiting time for the ending elapses in step S913. determine whether or not If the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for ending has passed, in step S914, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Here, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25(b).

First, in step S1201, a flag erasing process for erasing information for identifying the game state is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored in the RAM 114, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the state is maintained. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode flag is for the MPU 112 to specify that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. flag. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode transition flag is stored in the RAM 114 . If the high-probability mode transition flag is stored, the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1203. As a result, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, or if the process of step S1203 has been executed, the process advances to step S1204. In step S1204, processing for storing the high frequency support mode flag is executed. As a result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Then, in step S1205, after executing the processing of inputting "100" to the number-of-games counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. The number-of-games counter GC is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the number of times the high-frequency support mode continues, and is decremented by one at the start of one game round (for example, each time the fluctuation start process is executed). is. Then, when the number-of-games counter GC becomes "0", the high-frequency support mode flag is erased. As a result, when 100 game rounds are completed after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode ends and shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In this way, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is uniformly set to the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times regardless of the type of the opening/closing execution mode, and the condition is that a V win occurs during the opening/closing execution mode. is set to high-probability mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the switching between the distribution state and the non-distribution state of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310, which determines whether or not the V prize is generated, is the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Regardless of the end, it is performed at a predetermined operation cycle after power-on. That is, whether or not the V winning occurs depends not only on the occurrence of winning to the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode, but also on the timing of the occurrence of the winning, that is, when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state in the opening/closing execution mode. It can be said that the timing is determined by the relationship between the timing at which the first allocating member 300 and the second allocating member 310 are switched to the state of the V winning side.

As described above, in the present embodiment, rotation control of the rotor 201 is not performed during the open/close execution mode.

<Processing for controlling each character>
Processing for controlling periodic operations of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first role product control process for controlling the operation of the first distribution member 300, and FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing object control processing; Both the first role product control process and the second role product control process are processes started by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 at a cycle of 4 msec.

First, the first role product control process will be described. In step S1301, the first role product counter YK1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is incremented by one. The first accessory counter YK1 is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the operation timing of the first distribution member 300 and is a counter for managing the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 . The first accessory counter YK1 is a loop counter that can be updated by 1 every 4 msec between 1 and 20000, and is reset to 1 when it reaches 20000. That is, the first accessory counter YK1 is a counter that rotates once every 80 seconds, and the operation cycle of the first allocating member 300 is set to an operation cycle with one rotation of 80 seconds.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "4950". That is, it is determined whether or not it is the 19.8th sec in the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 . If the determination in step S1302 is affirmative, then in step S1303 the first distribution drive unit 300a of the first distribution member 300 is set to the non-driving state, and the first distribution member 300 is set to the non-distribution state (closed state). do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1302, or after the processing of step S1303 is executed, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "5000" (20.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1304 is affirmative, then in step S1305 the first distribution drive unit 300a is set in the driving state, and the first distribution member 300 is set in the distribution state (open state).

If a negative determination is made in step S1304, or after the processing of step S1305 is executed, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "9950" (39.8 sec). . If the determination in step S1306 is affirmative, then in step S1307 the first distributing member 300 is brought into the non-distributing state (closed state). If a negative determination is made in step S1306, or after the processing of step S1307 is executed, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "10000" (40.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1308 is affirmative, then in step S1309 the first distributing member 300 is placed in the distributing state (open state).

If a negative determination is made in step S1308, or after the processing of step S1309 is executed, it is determined in step S1310 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "14950" (59.8 sec). . If the determination in step S1310 is affirmative, then in step S1311 the first distributing member 300 is placed in the non-distributing state (closed state). If a negative determination is made in step S1310, or after executing the process of step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "15000" (60.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1312 is affirmative, then in step S1313 the first distributing member 300 is placed in the distributing state (open state).

If a negative determination is made in step S1312, or after the processing of step S1313 is executed, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "19250" (77.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1314 is affirmative, then in step S1315 the first distributing member 300 is brought into the non-distributing state (closed state). If a negative determination is made in step S1314, or after the processing of step S1315 is executed, it is determined in step S1316 whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 is "20000" (80.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1316 is affirmative, then in step S1317 the first distributing member 300 is placed in the distributing state (open state). Then, based on the completion of one operation cycle of the first distribution member 300, the first accessory counter YK1 is cleared to "1" in step S1318.

If a negative determination is made in step S1316, or after the process of step S1318 is executed, the first role product command is set in step S1319, and then the first role product control process is terminated. The first role product command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The first role product command includes information about the current control state of the first distribution member 300, more specifically, the value of the first role product counter YK1. Based on the received first role product command, the effect control device 82 grasps the operation status of the first distribution member 300 and performs processing therefor. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the second role product control processing will be described. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. to run. The second accessory counter YK2 is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the operation timing of the second distribution member 310 and is a counter for managing the operation cycle of the second distribution member 310 . The second accessory counter YK2 is a loop counter that can be updated by 1 every 4 msec between 1 and 150,000, and is reset to 1 when it reaches 150,000. That is, the second accessory counter YK2 is a counter that rotates once every 600 seconds, and the operation cycle of the second allocating member 310 is set to an operation cycle of 600 seconds.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the second accessory counter YK2 is "74250". That is, it is determined whether or not it is the 299.8th sec in the operation cycle of the second distribution member 310 . When an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the second distribution driving unit 310a of the second distribution member 310 is set in the driving state in step S1403, and the second distribution member 310 is set in the distribution state (open state).

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, or after the processing of step S1403 is executed, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the second accessory counter YK2 is "75000" (300.0 sec). . When an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, the second distribution driving unit 310a is set in the driving state and the second distribution member 310 is set in the non-distribution state (closed state) in step S1405.

If a negative determination is made in step S1404, or after the processing of step S1405 is executed, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the second accessory counter YK2 is "149250" (597.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1406 is affirmative, then in step S1407 the second distributing member 310 is placed in the distributing state (open state). If a negative determination is made in step S1406, or after the processing of step S1407 is executed, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the second accessory counter YK2 is "150000" (600.0 sec). . If the determination in step S1408 is affirmative, then in step S1409 the second distribution member 310 is brought into the non-distribution state (closed state). Then, based on the completion of one operation cycle of the second distribution member 310, the second accessory counter YK2 is cleared to "1" in step S1410.

When a negative determination is made in step S1408, or after the process of step S1410 is executed, the second role product control process is terminated after setting the second role product command in step S1411. The second role product command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The second role product command includes information about the current control state of the second distribution member 310, more specifically, the value of the second role product counter YK2. The effect control device 82 grasps the operation status of the second distribution member 310 based on the received second role product command, and performs processing therefor. This processing will be described later in detail.

The operation cycle of each distribution member 300, 310 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in order to make each motion easier to understand, the figure expresses the length of each motion with a length different from the length of time of the actual motion.

The first distribution member 300 has an operating cycle of 80.0 sec, and switches from the open state to the closed state at the 19.8 sec. That is, the game is switched to a state in which V winning is likely to occur. This state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (short-time mode), and switches from the closed state to the open state at 20.0 seconds. That is, the game is switched to a state in which V winning is less likely to occur. After repeating this operation for a short period of time three times, the open state is switched to the closed state at the 77.0th second, and a V prize is likely to occur. This state is maintained for 3.0 seconds (long time mode), and at the 80.0th second, the closed state is switched to the open state, making it difficult for V winning to occur.

In a situation where the first allocating member 300 is switched to a state in which V winning is likely to occur in a short period of time, V winning hardly occurs. On the other hand, in a situation where the first distribution member 300 is switched to a state in which the V winning is likely to occur in the long-time mode, the occurrence of the V winning can be expected. In other words, the first allocating member 300 is set to be in a state in which it is easy for the V prize to occur once in the operation period of 80.0 sec.

The second distribution member 310 has an operating cycle of 600.0 sec, and switches from the closed state to the open state at the 299.8 sec. That is, the game is switched to a state in which V winning is likely to occur. This state is maintained for 0.2 sec (short time mode), and switches from the open state to the closed state at 300.0 sec. That is, the game is switched to a state in which V winning is less likely to occur. Then, at the 597.0th second, the closed state is switched to the open state, and a V prize is likely to occur. This state is maintained for 3.0 seconds (long time mode), and at the 600.0th second, the state is switched from the open state to the closed state, making it difficult for a V prize to occur.

Thus, the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set to operate periodically regardless of the progress of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, whether or not the V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, that is, whether the success/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode or the low probability mode depends on the type of the jackpot result. is not fixed. In this way, unlike conventional games in which prize balls are obtained by simply generating winnings to the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode, how to generate V prizes during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to add games such as , and it is possible to extremely increase the degree of attention during the opening and closing execution mode. In particular, since the occurrence or non-occurrence of the V winning prize is irrelevant to the jackpot result, the first distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 300 is selected based on the game result at the start of the open/close execution mode or the start of each round. Compared to the configuration of setting the operation pattern of the dividing member 310 and setting the opening/closing execution mode and the round in which the V prize is likely to occur, the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 300 do not depend on the game result or the like. It is possible to draw a high degree of interest in the operation status of the distribution member 310 . In other words, in the configuration in which the operation patterns of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are set based on the game result, even though the configuration is such that the transition to the high-probability mode is made due to the V prize, the player wins. Although the action of the player such as whether or not to allow it is added, in the end, it may be the same as setting the high probability mode depending on the game result. Therefore, by separating the game result from the transition rate to the high-probability mode as in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to draw a high degree of attention to the action of the game ball, such as whether or not a V winning occurs.

However, as a result of separating the game result and the transition rate of the high probability mode as described above, there arises a problem that the symbol to be stopped in the game cycle that triggers the transition to the open/close execution mode is not linked to the high probability mode. obtain. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the combination of symbols to be stopped is determined by lottery or the like, regardless of the rate of transition to the high probability mode. However, if such a configuration is used, even though a plurality of symbols (see FIG. 10) are displayed in a variable manner, there will be no superiority or inferiority in the degree of advantage regardless of which symbol is aligned. , there is concern about the monotony of the production pattern. In particular, in many conventional gaming machines, odd-numbered symbols correspond to the high-probability mode, and even-numbered symbols correspond to the low-probability mode. Then, if an event such as not shifting to the high-probability mode (V winning does not occur) occurs even though the odd-numbered symbols are all stopped, the player not only feels a strong sense of incongruity, If the result is rewritten during the big win, the player may even feel distrust, and the motivation to continue the game may be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the progress of the opening/closing execution mode and the transition rate of the high-probability mode are separated from each other. have a certain configuration. The configuration will be described in detail below.

<Configuration on the side of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212>
The electrical configurations of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command described later is received. It also receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands. It also receives open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as an opening command, a closing command, an opening command, and an ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81 . The received command is stored in command storage area 248 provided in RAM 244 of MPU 242 . Then, processing such as analysis of the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. Various table storage areas 245 are provided in the ROM 243 of the MPU 242, and various flag storage areas 247 and various counter areas 249 are provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. When executing various effects, these areas are stored. It is possible to perform processing using

Further, when the above pending display control commands are received from the main control device 81 , the information of these commands is stored in the pending storage area 250 provided in the RAM 244 . As shown in FIG. 30, the holding storage area 250 comprises a first secondary holding area 250a and a second secondary holding area 250b corresponding to the holding ball storage area 114b on the main controller 81 side. . The first secondary reservation area 250a corresponds to the first result display section reservation area Ra, and the second secondary reservation area 250b corresponds to the second result display section reservation area Rb. The first secondary reservation area 250a and the second secondary reservation area 250b each have four storage areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each area is set so as to be able to store the information on the game result and the information on the variable display time included in each holding display control device command.

As already described, the output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and speaker unit 64 provided to the front door frame 14. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are mounted. there is

The MPU 272 receives, from the effect control device 82, a pending display control command (holding display control information) for holding display control, a game round control command (game round control information) for performing variable display of symbols, It receives an opening/closing execution mode command (opening/closing execution mode information) for displaying moving images during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 274 .

The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 275 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272 and the video RAM 277 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 276 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 276 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 .

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 277, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

<Processing related to various effects>
Next, processing related to various effects executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. Various processing for effect is provided as this processing, and the various processing for effect is a process that is periodically activated by the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

Various processing for effect will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, a hold control process is executed. In this processing, processing for setting the content of the effect (the content of the pending display and the content of the pending notice) based on the reception of the pending display control command (the shift command and the pending command) from the main control device 81 is performed.

In subsequent step S1502, variable display control processing is executed. In this processing, processing for setting the content of the effect (contents of the game round) based on the reception of the game round control command (variation command type command, variation end command, etc.) from the main control device 81 is performed. The variable display control process will be described later in detail.

In the following step S1503, processing for open/close execution mode is executed. In this process, the effect content (opening effect, each round effect, ending effect) is set based on the reception of the open/close execution mode command (opening command, closing command, opening command, ending command) from the main control device 81. process for In the subsequent step S1504, processing for demonstration screen is executed. In this process, the demo screen is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, or when the game is played but not played. to run.

Then, in step S1505, after performing other processing regarding the effect, the various processing for effect ends. In the other processing, processing for performing various settings, initialization, etc. of the various light emitting units 45 to 47, 63 for presentation, the speaker unit 64, and the like is executed. In addition, in a configuration in which a movable accessory is connected to the effect control device 82, processing such as setting the initial position of the movable accessory is performed in this process. In addition, in this other processing, a processing for performing an effect based on receiving an effect command (a command corresponding to the transition to the support mode or the lottery mode) in accordance with the transition of the game state is performed.

<Variation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82>
Next, the variable display control processing in step S1502 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the variable display control process, when a variable command transmitted from the main controller 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts variable display of symbols for one game, and the controller 81 transmits the variable display. When the fluctuation end command has been received, a process for final stop display (fixed stop display) of the variable display of the symbols is executed.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not one game round is being executed. If one game round is not being executed, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not a variation command has been received. If the command for variation has not been received, the variable display control process is terminated. If the variation command has been received, the variation start processing is executed in step S1603, and then the variation display control processing is terminated. On the other hand, if one game is being executed, it is determined in step S1604 whether or not a variation end command has been received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, the variable display control process is terminated after executing the process for during fluctuation in step S1605. In the mid-variation process, various devices and the display control device 212 are controlled so that various effects are performed according to the effect pattern set in the process for starting the change. Further, when the fluctuation end command is received, the fluctuation display control process is ended after the fluctuation end process is executed in step S1606. In the variable ending process, as a process for ending one game round, for example, various devices and the display control device 212 are controlled so that the variable display of the game round ends in a state where the stop result corresponding to the game result is stopped. do.

<Processing for start of fluctuation>
The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 33 to 37. FIG.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, in the fluctuation start process, in step S1701, a process of grasping the contents of the game result of the current game round is executed. That is, as already explained, when the main controller 81 transmits a command for variation, it also transmits a type command. Therefore, in step S1701, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read, and from the command, 4R jackpot result information, 8R jackpot result information, 12R jackpot result information, 16R jackpot result information, Information on the game result such as information on the result of losing is specified. Then, in subsequent step S1702, information on the variable display time is specified from the command for variation received this time.

Here, the variable display time of each game round will be explained again.

As already explained, the variable display time in the game round is set in the variable time setting process (FIG. 22) of the variable start process (FIG. 21). In this process, when the reach indication occurs, the variable display time table for reach occurrence is referred to, and when the reach indication does not occur, the variable display time is set by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence. .

In this pachinko machine 10, normal reach and super reach are set for the reach display. Here, the super reach is a reach display in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is set higher than that of the normal reach. Further, super reach A and super reach B are set for the super reach. The super reach A and the super reach B are set such that the super reach A has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the super reach B, and the performance contents are also different. Specifically, super reach A is set to reproduce a live-action movie, and super reach B is set to reproduce an animation movie.

The fluctuation display time table for reach generation and the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

In the reach generation fluctuation display time table, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the type of reach display and the fluctuation display time are uniquely determined by the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the held ball storage area 114b. It is Specifically, when the game result is one of the jackpot results, that is, when the game result is a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the ready-to-win display is generated regardless of the ready-to-win random number counter C3. In this case, the variation type counter CS determines the type of reach display and the variation display time. Specifically, the probability of selecting both super reach A and B is higher than that of normal reach, and the probability of selecting super reach B is higher than that of super reach A. The variable display time of each reach display is longer for both super reach A and B than for normal reach. More specifically, when the variation type counter CS is "0 to 49", super reach A is selected, when "50 to 179", super reach B is selected, and "180 to 199" normal reach is selected. The variable display time is "60 sec" when both super reach A and B are selected, and the variable display time is "30 sec" when normal reach is selected.

When the game result is a losing result, whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated is determined by the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3, and the ready-to-win display is generated when the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is "200 to 239". As the type of reach display, the probability that normal reach is selected is set higher than both super reach A and B, and when the fluctuation type counter CS is "0 to 9", super reach A is selected, " In the case of "10-39", the super reach B is selected, and in the case of "40-199", the normal reach is selected. When both super reach A and B are selected, the variable display time is set to "60 sec". When normal reach is selected, the variable display time is set to "30 sec".

In the reach non-occurrence variable display time table, as shown in FIG. A pattern corresponding to the number of holdings in which the variable display time is determined by the number CRN is defined. More specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS is "0 to 99", it becomes a pattern that does not correspond to the number of reservations, and a uniform variation display time of "10 sec" is set regardless of the value of the common number of reservations CRN. be. Further, when the value of the variation type counter CS is "100 to 199", it becomes a pattern corresponding to the number of reservations, and is set so that the larger the common number of reservations CRN, the shorter the variation display time. Specifically, the variable display time is "30 sec" when the common number CRN is "1", the variable display time is "20 sec" when it is "2", and the variable display when it is "3". The time is "10 sec", and the variable display time is "5 sec" in the case of "4" or more. Therefore, when a large number of pieces of reservation information are stored in the reservation ball storage area 114b, the variable display time is shortened, and the progress of the game becomes smooth. In addition, even if the hold information is not stored or if the stored number is small, the variable display time is lengthened so that the period during which the game is not executed is shortened as much as possible. It's becoming Note that the variable display time may be set differently depending on the reserved areas Ra and Rb that are stored.

Then, the variable display time of each game round is set by the variable display time setting process of the variable start process on the main controller 81 side, and the information of the variable display time is set in the variable command. The effect control device 82 can specify the variable display time of the game cycle to be started this time by grasping the command for variation.

Returning to the description of the process for starting fluctuation (FIG. 33), after executing the process of grasping the fluctuation display time in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, processing for holding notice is executed. In the pending notice process, for example, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a pending notice in this game round, and if the lottery is won or if it is decided to make a pending notice, the hold Setting is made so as to perform a game round performance in accordance with the content of the notice. Note that, as described above, as one process related to the setting of the advance notice on hold, the process for holding control (step S1501) is also set. That is, at the time of acquisition of the pending information and at the time of consuming the pending information (at the start of the game cycle), for example, the number of stored pending information will be different, and the game state (support state and winner lottery mode) high and low) can also be different. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which processing relating to the reservation notice is performed in two systems, at the time of acquisition and at the time of consumption, it is possible to execute the reservation notice according to the respective game situations, even if the respective game situations are different. .

After executing the reservation notice process in step S1703, the process for determining the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the current game round is executed in steps S1704 to S1706. That is, in step S1704, based on the information grasped in step S1701, whether or not the game round to be started this time is the game round corresponding to the big hit result, that is, whether or not it is the game round to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether If it is not a jackpot result but a game round corresponding to a loss result, in step S1705, a symbol determination process for loss is executed. In this process, for example, a stop line determination process, a pattern combination determination process, a storage process of address information of stop information, and the like are executed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as already described, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, and when any one of the jackpot results is obtained, one of the A combination of jackpot symbols is stop-displayed on the activated line. Further, when the ready-to-win display is displayed even if the result is not any of the jackpots, the combination of the ready-to-win symbols is stop-displayed on any of the effective lines. In this case, in the stop line determination process, a process for determining an effective line for stop-displaying the combination of various symbols is executed. In the symbol combination determination process, the combination information table provided in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is referred to, and the symbol combination information corresponding to the variable display time grasped in step S1702 is specified. A stop information table is provided in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 . In the stop information table, the information on the combination of each stop symbol with respect to the information on each activated line is set in one-to-one correspondence with the address information. In the stop information address storage process, address information corresponding to the specified stop line information and pattern combination information is specified from the stop information table.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1704 that the current game round corresponds to a big win result, a big win symbol determination process is executed in step S1706. This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1705 or step S1706, in step S1707, the setting process of the effect pattern of the game round to be started this time is executed. In this process, the game result and the variable display time ascertained in steps S1701 to S1703, the presence or absence of a pending notice, and the effect pattern table corresponding to the stop symbol determined in step S1705 or step S1706 are stored in various tables of the ROM 243. It reads out from the storage area 245, acquires a random number counter for effect setting from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and sets a game cycle effect pattern corresponding to the random number counter.

Then, in step S1708, the effect pattern command including the information of the effect pattern set in step S1707 and the stop result command including the information of the stop result set in step S1705 or step S1706 are transmitted to the display control device 212. do. In the display control device 212, based on the received effect pattern command and stop result command, the data table for performing the effect for the current game cycle on the pattern display device 41 is read out from the program ROM 273, and predetermined according to the data table. The drawing list is output to the VDP 275 each time the image update timing comes (for example, in a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, in the pattern display device 41, an effect for the game cycle is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82, and the stop result determined by the MPU 242 is finally stop-displayed. . After executing the process of step S1708, the process for starting fluctuation ends.

<Symbol determination process for jackpot>
The symbol determination process for big wins will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The symbol determination process for the jackpot can be roughly divided into the process of grasping the control state of various roles in steps S1801 and S1802, the process of determining the stop symbol and the stop line in steps S1802 and S1809, divided into As already explained, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result and the rate of transition to the high-probability mode (V winning rate) are not linked, and at the start of the game round to shift to the open/close execution mode, the high probability The mode transition rate cannot be grasped from the game result. Therefore, in the symbol determination process for big wins, the stop symbols are determined based on the operating conditions of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 which periodically operate as various accessories.

That is, in the big hit symbol determination process, first, in step S1801, a first distribution member process for grasping the operation status of the first distribution member 300 is executed. In step S1802, second distribution member processing for grasping the operation status of the second distribution member 310 is executed.

The first distribution member processing and the second distribution member processing will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 and 37 . It should be noted that when explaining the processing for each sorting member, the explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing state of each opening/closing execution mode in FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between is additionally referred to.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, the processing for the first distribution member includes information on the current open/close execution mode in steps S1901 to S1904, game round information, and the current control state of the first distribution member 300. Information grasping processing for grasping the information of, calculation processing of steps S1905 to step S1910 and processing for design determination are included.

That is, in the information grasping process, first, in step S1901, the actual opening/closing time excluding the opening time and the ending time is grasped from the time required for the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted based on the result of the current big win. Execute the processing to be performed.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, each round in the opening and closing execution mode is terminated by the elapse of the open time out of the two end conditions such as the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls and the elapse of the open time. It is designed to be easy to use. Specifically, the length of the open time is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and the maximum winning number, and in each round, the maximum winning number of game balls wins. is set to be difficult. Therefore, the length of each round is predictable to some extent before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the length of the actual opening/closing time in each opening/closing execution mode is based on the premise that the length of each round is determined by the opening time. is set.

More specifically, in each opening/closing execution mode, the opening time is set to 5 seconds in all opening/closing execution modes, and the ending time is also set to 5 seconds in all opening/closing execution modes. Also, the waiting time between rounds is set to 1.5 sec between any rounds in any opening/closing execution mode. The opening time of each round is set to 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 38, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the open/close execution mode and the opening time has passed, the first round of the round game is started. Then, the round game of the first round is continued for 5 seconds unless the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls occurs. After a waiting time of 1.5 sec, the second round game is started. For example, in the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds based on the result of the 16R jackpot, 0 sec to 5 sec from the start is a state in which no game ball can enter, more specifically, a state in which V winning cannot occur. is. Also, 5 sec to 107.5 sec from the start of the 1st round to the end of the 16th round corresponds to the actual opening/closing time during which the round game is played. The actual opening/closing time is 102.5 sec, and in this state, a game ball can enter, and more specifically, a V win can occur.

Here, the standby time (1.5 sec) of each round is the period in which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are in a state of distributing to the V winning side, especially the long-term 3.0 sec ( (see FIG. 28). Therefore, even if the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member are in the long-time mode immediately after the end of each round, the long-time mode is maintained until the start of the next round. Become. In other words, even if the waiting time between rounds overlaps with the state of the long mode, there will always be timing that overlaps with either the preceding round or the following round. there is Since this is done, it is not necessary to consider the waiting time between rounds when grasping the time when the V prize can occur, and the processing configuration can be greatly simplified.

In addition, the opening time of each round is set to be longer than the time (4.8 sec) obtained by subtracting the time twice the firing cycle from the product of the firing cycle and the maximum winning number (6.0 sec). . Therefore, for example, if one extra ball is entered at the start and end of the round due to variations in the flow of game balls, the maximum number of winnings can occur. In other words, while keeping the duration of each round constant to some extent as described above, by making it variable, it is also possible to motivate players to somehow generate the maximum number of prizes won. ing.

The actual opening/closing time in each opening/closing execution mode is 102.5 sec in the 16-round opening/closing execution mode, 76.5 sec in the 12-round opening/closing execution mode, and 50.5 sec in the 8-round opening/closing execution mode. , 24.5 sec in the opening and closing execution mode of 4 rounds.

Returning to the description of the first distribution member processing (FIG. 36), in step S1901, the actual opening/closing time (24.5 sec to 102.5 sec) of these opening/closing execution modes is grasped, and the grasped time information is A process of temporarily storing in the register of the MPU 242 as information A for calculation is executed.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the calculation information A temporarily stored in step S1901 is 102.5.

Here, among the actual opening/closing times in each opening/closing execution mode, the actual opening/closing times in the opening/closing execution modes of 16 rounds are longer than the operation cycle (80.0 sec) of the first distribution member 300 . Therefore, the first distribution member 300 performs at least one periodic operation during the 16-round opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, at least once during the 16-round opening/closing execution mode actual opening/closing time. , the first distribution member 300 is in a state of distributing to the V winning side in a long time mode. In other words, regardless of the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode is started or the control state of the first distribution member 300, the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds can be distributed to the V winning side by the first distribution member 300. have a nature.

Therefore, in step S1902, when the information A for calculation is 102.5, it is configured to shift to the pattern determination process (step S1909) without performing the subsequent information grasping process or calculation process. there is

In step S1902, when it is determined that the information A for calculation is not 102.5, in the subsequent step S1903, the fluctuation display time of the current game round is grasped, and the grasped information is used for calculation. A process of temporarily storing it in the register of the MPU 242 as the information B is executed.

Here, the relationship between the variable display time of each game cycle and the winable time in the open/close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

As already explained, the variable display time is set to either 60 seconds or 30 seconds in game rounds that result in a big win. Of these, when 60 sec is set, as shown in FIG. 39, if the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to is the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds, the variable display time (60 sec) and the opening time ( 5 sec) and 65.0 sec after the elapse, it becomes possible to win a prize to the accessory device 150 . Then, winning to the accessory device 150 is possible until 167.5 seconds after adding the actual opening/closing time of 102.5 seconds.

Similarly, if the variable display time is 60 seconds and the switching execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode of 12 rounds, the accessory device 150 is displayed from 65.0 seconds to 141.5 seconds after the start timing of the game cycle. It's time to win a prize. Further, if the variable display time is 60 seconds and the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to is the 8-round opening/closing execution mode, the accessory device 150 is displayed from 65.0 seconds to 115.5 seconds after the start timing of the game cycle. It will be the time when you can win a prize. Then, if the variable display time is 60 seconds, and the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to is the opening/closing execution mode of 4 rounds, the accessory device 150 is displayed from 65.0 seconds to 89.5 seconds after the start timing of the game cycle. It will be the time when you can win a prize.

Then, when the variable display time is 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 40, in either open/close execution mode, winning to the accessory device 150 becomes possible after 35.0 seconds from the start timing of the game cycle. 137.5 seconds in the 16-round opening/closing execution mode, 111.5 seconds in the 12-round opening/closing execution mode, 85.5 seconds in the 8-round opening/closing execution mode, and 4 rounds. In the opening/closing execution mode, the winning of prizes to the accessory device 150 is allowed until 59.5 seconds later.

In this way, it is possible to predict the timing at which the prize to the accessory device 150 may occur after the start timing of the game cycle, by the variable display time and the type of the opening/closing execution mode. . Therefore, in addition to the information on the actual opening/closing time of the opening/closing execution mode grasped in step S1901, information on the variable display time of the current game cycle is grasped in step S1903.

Now, after grasping the information of the variable display time of the game round in step S1903, in step S1904, the information of the current control state of the first distribution member 300 is grasped, and the information is used as information for calculation. As C, a process of temporarily storing in a register of the MPU 242 is executed. Information on the current control state of the first distribution member 300 can be grasped from the value of the first role product counter YK1 included in the first role product command received from the main controller 81 . That is, in step S1904, the latest first role product command is read from the command storage area 248, information on which stage of the periodic operation the first distribution member 300 is in is grasped from the first role product command, Store that information.

In the following step S1905, based on the information C temporarily stored in step S1904 and the information (80.0 sec) of the operation cycle of the first allocating member 300, the next long time state is allocated to the V winning side. Information on the period required until the time is reached is calculated as information D for calculation, and processing for temporarily storing the information D in the register of the MPU 242 is executed. In the following description, the state of distributing to the V winning side in the long time mode is also referred to as the V mode.

In the following step S1906, the information obtained by adding the opening time to the information B of the current variable display time is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 as the information E for calculation. As already explained, if the variable display time is 60.0 sec, the calculation information E is 65.0 sec, and if the variable display time is 30.0 sec, the calculation information E is 35.0 sec.

In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information D for calculation. In other words, it is determined whether or not the period required until the award to the accessory device 150 can occur is equal to or longer than the period required until the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode next time.

The affirmative determination in step S1907 means that the first distribution member 300 is in the V mode before the start of the first round in which the accessory device 150 can win a prize. In other words, at the timing of the next V mode, the winning to the accessory device 150 cannot occur, so the V winning cannot occur. Therefore, assuming the next V mode, it is determined in step S1908 whether a prize to the role product device 150 can occur, that is, whether a V prize can occur. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information obtained by adding the information A for calculation to the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information obtained by adding the information for the interval of the V mode to the information D for calculation. In other words, the period required from the start timing of the game cycle to the end of the winning time (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is longer than the period required until the next V mode is achieved from the start timing of the game cycle. Determine whether or not

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the first allocating member 300 will be in the V state during the winable time of the open/close execution mode to be shifted this time, and in step S1909, V A process of adding 1 to the winning point VP is executed. The V winning point VP is a counter that is referred to when determining a pattern to stop a game round. After executing the process of step S1909, the process for the first distribution member ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1908, it is assumed that the first allocating member 300 will not be in the V state during the winning possible time of the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to this time, and the addition processing of the V winning points VP will not be performed. , ends the processing for the first distribution member.

On the other hand, a negative determination in step S1907 means that the first distribution member 300 does not change to the V mode before the start of the first round in which the accessory device 150 can win. In this case, the process advances to step S1910 to determine whether or not the timing of the next V mode is included in the winable time in the open/close execution mode to be shifted this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the available time obtained by adding the information A for calculation to the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information D for calculation. If the determination in step S1910 is affirmative, the V winning point VP is added in step S1909 assuming that the first allocating member 300 is in the V mode during the winable time of the open/close execution mode to be shifted to this time. , the processing for the first distribution member ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1910, the processing for the first distribution member is terminated without performing the processing for adding the V winning prize points.

Further, if the determination in step S1902 is affirmative, it means that the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time is the 16-round opening/closing execution mode, and the actual opening/closing time is longer than the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 . In this case, it means that the first distribution member 300 will be in the V state during the winable time of the opening/closing execution mode of this time, without performing the information grasping process and the calculation process of steps S1903 to S1908. . Therefore, if the determination in step S1902 is affirmative, the process advances to step S1909 to execute V winning point addition processing, and then the first distribution member processing ends. When the processing for the first distribution member ends, information for various calculations stored in the register of the MPU 242 is erased.

Next, the processing for the second distribution member in step S1802 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, the actual opening/closing time of the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to this time is grasped, and the grasped information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 as information A for calculation. This process is the same as the process of step S1901. In the subsequent step S2002, information on the variable display time of the current game round is grasped, and the information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 as information B for calculation. This process is the same as the process of step S1903.

In step S2003, information on the current control state of the second distribution member 310 is grasped, and the information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 as information C for calculation. Information on the current control state of the second distribution member 310 can be grasped from the value of the second role product counter YK2 included in the second role product command received from the main controller 81 . That is, in step S2003, the latest second role product command is read from the command storage area 248, information on which stage of the periodic operation the second distribution member 310 is in from the second role product command is grasped, Store that information.

In the following step S2004, based on the information C temporarily stored in step S2003 and the information (600.0 sec) of the operation cycle of the second allocating member 310, the state of being allocated to the V winning side in the next long time mode ( V mode) is calculated as information D for calculation, and the information D is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 .

In the subsequent step S2005, a process of temporarily storing the information obtained by adding the opening time to the information B of the current variable display time in the register of the MPU 242 as the information E for calculation is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S1906.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information D for calculation. In other words, it is determined whether or not the period required for winning the prize to the accessory device 150 is equal to or longer than the period required for the second distribution member 310 to change to the V mode next time.

The affirmative determination in step S2006 means that the second distribution member 310 is in the V mode before the start of the first round in which the accessory device 150 can win a prize. In other words, at the timing of the next V mode, the winning to the accessory device 150 cannot occur, so the V winning cannot occur. Therefore, assuming the next V mode, it is determined in step S2007 whether a prize to the role product device 150 can occur, that is, whether a V prize can occur. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information obtained by adding the information A for calculation to the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information obtained by adding the information for the interval of the V mode to the information D for calculation. In other words, it is determined whether or not the period required from the start timing of the game round to the end of the possible winning time is equal to or longer than the period required until the next V mode is established from the start timing of the game round.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, the second allocating member 310 is assumed to be in the V state during the winable time of the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time, and in step S2008, processing for adding 1 to the V winning point VP is executed. do. After executing the process of step S2008, the process for the second distribution member ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2007, it is assumed that the second allocating member 310 will not be in the V mode during the winning possible time of the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to this time, and the addition processing of the V winning points VP will not be performed. , ends the processing for the second distribution member.

On the other hand, a negative determination in step S2006 means that the second distribution member 310 does not change to the V mode before the start of the first round in which the accessory device 150 can win. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2009, and it is determined whether or not the timing of the next V mode is included in the winable time in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the available time obtained by adding the information A for calculation to the information E for calculation is greater than or equal to the information D for calculation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the second allocating member 310 is assumed to be in the V state during the possible winning time of the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time, and addition processing of V winning points VP is performed in step S2008. , the process for the second distribution member ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process for the second distribution member ends without performing the process of adding the V prize points.

Returning to the description of the symbol determination processing for the big hit (FIG. 35), after executing the first distribution member processing of step S1801 and the second distribution member processing of step S1802, step S1803 to step S1807 symbol determination Move to processing for That is, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not the V winning point VP is two. The case where the V winning point VP is 2 means that the first distribution member 300 distributes to the V winning side and the second distributing member 310 distributes to the V winning side in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time. This is a case where there is a possibility of both. In this case, it is extremely likely that a V win will occur in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to this time and the high probability mode will be set, so that the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the current game round is 3 or 7 of the odd numbers. is determined as the first specific symbol to which is attached.

If the determination in step S1803 is negative, it is determined in step S1805 whether the V winning point VP is 1 or not. The case where the V winning point VP is 1 means that the first distribution member 300 distributes to the V winning side and the second distributing member 310 distributes to the V winning side in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time. and when there is a possibility of either. In this case, although it is lower than the case where the V winning point VP is 2, there is a possibility that the V winning will occur in the opening and closing execution mode to be shifted this time and the high probability mode will be set. A symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined as a second specific symbol attached with an odd number other than 3 or 7. - 特許庁

A negative determination in step S1805 means that the V prize points VP are zero. In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted to this time, the possibility of both the case of being distributed to the V winning side by the first distributing member 300 and the case of being distributed to the V winning side by the second distributing member 310 is low. is the case. In this case, assuming that there is a low possibility that V winning will occur in the opening/closing execution mode to be shifted this time and the high probability mode will be set, the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the current game round will be non-specific symbols with even numbers. Determined as

After any one of steps S1804, S1806, and S1807 is executed, stop line determination processing is executed in step S1808. In the stop line determination process, a lottery or the like is used to determine on which of the valid lines L1 to L5 the symbols determined in the process of step S1804, step S1806, or step S1807 are to be stopped. Then, in step S1809, after executing the process of storing the information of the stop result of the symbol and the stop line as the address information, the symbol determination process for the big win is finished.

As already explained, the big hit symbol determination process is a process executed in the variation start process at the start of the game cycle. Then, the symbols set at the start of the game cycle as described above stop together at the end of the game cycle, and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the rate of occurrence of V prizes during the opening/closing execution mode are notified. . In this case, when the symbols are determined, the V winning rate and the symbols are associated with each other, without changing the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 that operate periodically. It is possible to determine the pattern.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the level of the success/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is independent of the progress of the opening/closing execution mode. In the configuration determined by the allocation operation of the V prize of the member 310, the operation status of the first allocation member 300 and the second allocation member 310, the operation cycle, the variable display time of the game round, and the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing execution mode Therefore, it is configured to predict the occurrence of the V winning during the opening/closing execution mode, and determine the symbols to be stopped in the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. By doing so, the game result and the occurrence of the V prize are separated, and while the game in which the V prize is generated during the opening/closing execution mode is enjoyed, the stop symbol in the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. and the V winning rate can be associated. Therefore, not only the open/close execution mode but also the game cycle can be favorably noticed.

As the opening/closing mode in the opening/closing execution mode, the V winning rate is predicted based on the actual opening/closing time of each round. The processing configuration can be greatly simplified.

In this case, the standby time (1.5 sec) of each round is set to be shorter than the time (3.0 sec) during which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are in the V mode. Even if the standby time of the round and the time of the V mode overlap, the V mode and each round (open time) always overlap. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy when performing prediction based on the actual opening/closing time as described above.

Since the opening time of each round in the open/close execution mode is set to be longer than the firing cycle and shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit winning number, at least in the round game in which the winning of the game ball can occur, the round can be completed. The execution period can be fixed to some extent. In other words, the round game ends when either the maximum number of winnings is won or the opening time elapses. , each round game can be easily ended when a predetermined opening time elapses. In this way, in the configuration in which the V winning rate is predicted in advance as described above, the opening time can be predicted as a fixed one, and the prediction accuracy can be improved. In particular, since the predicted result (V winning rate) is notified as the result of stopping the game, if the notification and the actual V winning rate are different, the player not only feels uncomfortable, You may even feel a sense of suspicion that the game results have been rewritten during the open/close execution mode. Therefore, by making it easier for each round to have a fixed time as described above, the prediction accuracy can be improved, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be avoided.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the operation period of the first distribution member 300 is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 was 80.0 sec. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation period of the first distribution member 300 is set to 600.0 sec, which is the same as the operation period of the second distribution member 310 . Hereinafter, processing when the operation period of the first distribution member 300 is set to 600.0 sec will be described.

First, the first role product control process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the first role product control process is a process that is periodically activated by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 .

In step S2101, a process of adding the first accessory counter YK1 is executed. Then, in steps S2102 to S2136, a process of determining whether or not it is time to switch the first distribution member 300, and a process of performing drive control of the first distribution drive unit 300a when it is time to switch. , repeatedly. In this embodiment, the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 is determined so that the V mode is maintained for 3.0 seconds every 60.0 seconds.

Specifically, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 is switched to the non-distribution state is 60.0 seconds after the start of the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 (YK1=0) (YK1=15000, step S2102 ), after 123.0 sec (YK1=30750, step S2106), after 186.0 sec (YK1=46500, step S2110), after 249.0 sec (YK1=62250, step S2114), after 312.0 sec (YK1=78000, step S2118), after 375.0 sec (YK1=93750, step S2122), after 438.0 sec (YK1=109500, step S2126), after 501.0 sec (YK1=125250, step S2130), after 564.0 sec (YK1= 141000, step S2134) are set respectively. When these timings come, the first distribution drive unit 300a of the first distribution member 300 is switched to the non-distribution state (closed state) by switching to the non-distribution state (steps S2103, S2107, S2111, Steps S2115, S2119, S2123, S2127, S2131 and S2135) are executed.

Further, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 is switched to the distribution state is set to 3.0 sec after switching to the non-distribution state, and the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 starts (YK1 = 0), after 63.0 sec (YK1 = 15750, step S2104), after 126.0 sec (YK1 = 31500, step S2108), after 189.0 sec (YK1 = 47250, step S2112), after 252.0 sec (YK1 = 63000, step S2116), after 315.0 sec (YK1 = 78750, step S2120), after 378.0 sec (YK1 = 94500, step S2124), after 441.0 sec (YK1 = 110250, step S2128), after 503.0 sec (YK1=126000, step S2132) and after 567.0 sec (YK1=141750, step S2136) are set respectively. When these timings come, the first distribution driving unit 300a of the first distribution member 300 is switched to the distribution state (open state) as the drive state (steps S2105, S2109, S2113, S2117). , step S2121, step S2125, step S2129, step S2133, step S2137).

In step S2138, it is determined whether or not the first accessory counter YK1 has reached "150000" (600.0 sec). A case where affirmative determination is made in step S2138 means a case where one operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 is completed. In this case, the first accessory counter YK1 is cleared to "1" in step S2139. Execute the processing to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2138, or after executing the process of step S2139, the first role product command is set to be transmitted in step S2140, and then the first role product control process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is set to be in the V mode for 3 seconds 9 times out of 600.0 seconds as one cycle. The interval between the V mode and the V mode once in one cycle is 60.0 sec. On the other hand, since the ninth V mode ends after 567.0 sec, the interval between the ninth V mode and the first V mode of the next cycle is 93.0 sec. In other words, the timing of the V mode shifts by 33.0 sec each time one cycle is performed. By doing so, it is possible to vary the timing of the V mode even in a configuration that performs periodic operation.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which makes the space|interval of each V mode in one period different. Specifically, the first V mode in one cycle of the first distribution member 300 is 60.0 sec later, and the interval to the second V mode is 90.0 sec, which is longer than the first time. The interval to each V mode may be different, such as after 45.0 sec, which is shorter than the first or second time, and so on. By doing so, the timing of the V mode is more varied, and the variety of games can be achieved. However, in order to be able to grasp that the V mode occurs once in the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds without performing calculations, the interval between each V mode must be shorter than the actual opening and closing time in the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds. It is good to have a configuration that

Incidentally, the period required from the start timing of the game round to the end of the winable time in step S1908 of the first distribution member processing (FIG. 36) in the present embodiment is the next next in terms of the start timing of the game round. In the process of determining whether or not the period required to reach the V mode is equal to or longer than the period required for the V mode, the information obtained by adding the calculation information A to the calculation information E is added to the calculation information D from the next V mode to the next V mode. It is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to the information obtained by adding the interval information up to the next V mode. In this way, it is possible to calculate the V winning rate even if the intervals between the V modes are not uniform.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the operation period of the first distribution member 300 and the operation period of the second distribution member 310 are set to have the same length, it is possible to share a counter for counting one period. is. Specifically, the counter YK1 for the first role product and the counter YK2 for the second role product are shared, and the shared counter is added and updated in the first role product control process or the second role product control process. In addition, each switching timing is grasped based on the common counter. By doing so, the processing configuration can be simplified.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the rotating body 201 of the accessory device 150 is rotated during the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a rotating body control process for rotating the rotating body 201 . The rotating body control process is a process started by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 at a predetermined cycle (4 msec cycle).

In step S2201, a process of adding 1 to the third accessory counter YK3 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The third accessory counter YK3 corresponds to the first accessory counter YK1 and the second accessory counter YK2, and is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the operation timing of the rotor 201 . Further, the third accessory counter YK3 can also be said to be a counter for managing the operation cycle of the rotor 201 . The third accessory counter YK3 is a loop counter that can be updated by 1 every 4 msec between 1 and 2500, and is reset to 1 when it reaches 2500. That is, the third accessory counter YK3 is a counter that makes one turn every 10 seconds, and the operation cycle of the rotating body 201 is set to the operation cycle with one turn being 10 seconds.

In step S2202, the driving unit 194 for rotating body is driven and controlled so as to rotate the rotating body 201 by a predetermined angle (0.144 degrees). Then, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the third role product counter YK3 is "2500" corresponding to one round. Execute processing to clear YK3 to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or after the processing of step S2204 is executed, the rotating body command is set to be output to the effect control device 82 in step S2205, and then the rotating body control processing ends. The rotator command corresponds to the first role product command and the second role product command, and is used to make the effect control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, grasp the control state (position) of the rotator 201. is a command.

That is, the rotating body 201 is set to rotate by a predetermined angle at a cycle of 4 msec each time the rotating body control process is activated. In other words, the rotating body 201 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle each time the third accessory counter YK3 is incremented by 1 as a predetermined number. The timing for rotating the predetermined angle is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to rotate by a predetermined angle (1.44 degrees) each time the third accessory counter YK3 is incremented by 10. Alternatively, each time the third accessory counter YK3 is incremented by 50, it may be controlled to rotate by a predetermined angle (7.2 degrees). However, it is preferable to set each control timing at a shorter interval because it is possible to realize a smoother operation of the rotating body 201 .

In the present embodiment, the third accessory counter YK3 is set to 1 when the V winning hole guide portion 204 is arranged at a position corresponding to the lead-out portion 186. FIG.

Next, the processing for the first distribution member in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43 . As already explained, the first distribution member process is a process performed in the big hit symbol determination process ( FIG. 35 ) executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 .

In this embodiment, the processes of steps S2301 to S2307 and S2310 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1901 to S1908 and S1910 to determine whether or not to add the V winning points VP. Note that in the present embodiment, when the 16-round open/close execution mode is set, the process of not performing the information grasping process (the process of step S1902) is not executed. If an affirmative determination is made in the processing of step S2307 or step S2310, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped in step S2308 and the first distribution member 300 is moved before performing the processing of adding the V winning points VP. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is arranged at a position corresponding to the lead-out portion 186 at the timing of the V mode. Specifically, the timing when the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode when the affirmative determination is made in step S2307 or step S2310 (information on the period until the next next V mode, or the next V mode In the information of the period until the time is reached), it is determined whether or not the counter of the rotating body 201 is "1 to 150" or "2000 to 2500".

If a negative determination is made in step S2308, the processing for the first distribution member ends without performing the processing for adding the V winning points VP. That is, in this case, although the first allocating member 300 is in the V mode, it is highly likely that the rotating body 201 will be allotted to the exit 182b, and the V prize points VP are not added. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, the processing for adding the V winning points VP is performed, and then the processing for the first distribution member ends.

In this way, even in a configuration in which the rotating body 201 rotates, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped at the start of a game cycle, and the operation cycle of the rotating body 201, the variable display time of the game cycle, and the opening/closing execution mode are determined. Based on the opening/closing pattern, it is possible to predict the V distribution by the rotor 201 during the opening/closing execution mode.

In this case, the game ball distributed by the first distribution member 300 reaches the rotating body 201 and is also distributed by the rotating body 201. The V mode (in the rotating body 201, the V winning opening guide portion 204 is arranged at a position corresponding to the lead-out portion 186) in a cycle shorter than the operation cycle of the 1 distribution member 300. FIG. Therefore, the processing for calculating the possibility of V distribution by the first distribution member 300 is performed prior to the V distribution by the rotating body 201, and then the processing for calculating the rotating body 201 is performed. and By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the processing for calculating the rotating body 201 is performed, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

As already explained, the game balls V-distributed by the second distributing member 310 can win V prizes without being distributed by the rotor 201 . Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that calculation processing for the rotating body 201 is not performed in the processing for the second distribution member. Here, in the configuration in which a plurality of accessories are involved in the V distribution, the more involved accessories are, the more complicated the flow of the game ball becomes, and the more the player's interest can be enhanced. On the other hand, in the configuration for predicting the possibility of V allocation from the action cycle of the character, the more characters involved, the more the prediction accuracy may decrease. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the side with high prediction accuracy is easily reflected in design determination, or the side with low prediction accuracy is less likely to be reflected in design determination. Specifically, the route through which the game ball entering the role device 150 is V-winning includes the route through the distribution of the first distribution member 300 and the rotating body 201 and the route of the second distribution member 310. It is considered that the prediction accuracy of the V prize rate is different between routes that pass through distribution. Then, the addition processing of the V winning points VP on the first distribution member 300 side is made to add fewer points than the addition processing on the second distribution member 310 side, or the points are added at a low frequency. It may be configured as follows.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first to third embodiments, the pattern of the game round is determined at the start of the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, but in the present embodiment, it is configured to be determined when the hold information is acquired. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, as the holding images displayed as the holding information in the holding display areas Ga and Gb in the display screen G, the normal holding image P1 and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode are suggested. A special holding image P2 is set. The special hold image P2 is displayed in a different color and shape from the normal hold image P1, and is distinguishable from the normal hold image P1. The special holding image P2 is suggested by the stop pattern of the game cycle when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 44(c), an image suggesting that the 5 symbols (second specific symbol) will stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, or that 4 symbols will stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. An image etc. suggesting is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a suspension notice that suggests a transition rate to the high-probability mode is executed using the suspension image.

<Processing related to pending notice>
A configuration for making a hold notice will be described below.

The suspension notice before the start of the game round is set in the suspension control process (step S1501) in the effect control device 82. FIG. As described above, the hold control process is a process that is performed based on the reception of the hold display control command from the main control device 81, and the process sets the hold display and the hold notice effect. Therefore, prior to the processing on the effect control device 82 side, the processing regarding the setting of the pending display control command (especially the pending command) executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described. As processing on the main control unit 81 side, confirmation processing for suspension (step S305 in FIG. 17) and processing for setting a suspension command (step S306 in FIG. 17) are set, and each of these processing is timer interrupt processing. Winning process (FIG. 16) for the working opening set as part of the process (FIG. 15), more specifically, is configured to be executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S205. In other words, the suspension confirmation process and the suspension command setting process are configured to be executed at the timing when the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs.

<Confirmation process for holding>
In the hold confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. The common pending number CRN stored in the total pending number storage area of the area 114 b is read, and information on the pending number is stored in the register of the MPU 112 . After that, in steps S2402 to S2406, it is checked whether or not the reservation information obtained by the current winning includes the information of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, first in step S2402, information for judging the big hit among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, that is, the acquired big hit random number counter Grasp the value of C1.

In subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2404, and the information for the big hit determination grasped in step S2402 by referring to the low probability mode propriety table shown in FIG. 13(a) (value of the big hit random number counter C1) is included in the information group corresponding to winning the jackpot. If it is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2405, and the information for judging the big hit (the random number counter C1 value) is included in the information set as jackpot winning.

After step S2404 or step S2405, the process proceeds to step S2406, and it is determined whether or not the information for judging the big win (the value of the random number counter C1 for the big win) grasped in step S2402 corresponds to winning the big win. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 112 in step S2407, and the confirmation processing for this reservation is finished.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the information for the out-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped. .

In the subsequent step S2409, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 113 is referred to. After that, in step S2510, it is determined whether or not the value of reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 112 in step S2411, and then this confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for setting hold command>
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pending command setting process is a process for allowing the performance control device 82 side to grasp the propriety determination result of the pending information and the variable display time.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not big win information is stored. When the jackpot information is stored, in steps S2502 and S2503, a process for making the effect control device 82 grasp the information on the type of jackpot result and the information on the variable display time is executed. Specifically, in step S2502, it is grasped which of the 4R jackpot result, the 8R jackpot result, the 12R jackpot result, and the 16R jackpot result the hold information corresponds to, and further the change type counter CS of the hold information is checked and the change is displayed. Grasp the time. As already explained, the ready-to-win display always occurs in the case of any of the jackpot results, so the fluctuation display time can be grasped based on the fluctuation type counter CS.

If the jackpot information is not stored in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the hold information causes the ready-to-win display. Specifically, the numerical value information of the reach random number counter C3 is acquired, and when the reach random number counter C3 is "200 to 239", it is determined that the reach display is pending information.

If the hold information causes the reach display, in step S2504, the change display time of the hold information is grasped. In this process, the change type counter CS of the pending information and the change display time table for reach occurrence (FIG. 34(a)) are obtained to grasp the change display time.

If the hold information does not cause the reach display in step S2503, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the hold information of this time is the information of the hold number corresponding pattern (hold number corresponding information). If it is not the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations but the information of the pattern that does not correspond to the number of reservations, the process proceeds to step S2504, and the change type counter CS of the reservation information and the fluctuation display time table for reach non-occurrence (Fig. 34 (b) ) and to get a grasp of the variable display time.

If it is determined in step S2505 that it is the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations, it means that the variable display time of game rounds is not determined at the present stage (at the time of acquisition of the reservation). Therefore, in this case, in step S2506, a process of recognizing the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is executed.

After executing any one of steps S2502, S2504, and S2506, the process advances to step S2507. In step S2507, the pending command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and the setting process of this pending command is terminated. The hold command includes information on the game result of the hold information this time and information on the variable display time. When the process of step S2506 is being performed, information indicating that it is a pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is included as the information of the variable display time. The hold command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The production control device 82 executes the light emission control of the holding light emitting units 45 and 46 based on the received holding command, and controls the display control device 212 to hold in the holding display areas Ga and Gb of the pattern display device 41. Execute processing to change the image for use.

In addition, although it is configured that the information on the game result is included in the pending command, it is configured to include the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. The game result may be grasped by the effect control device 82 based on the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. In addition, although the pending command includes information on the variable display time, it is configured to include information on the variable type counter CS, and a table similar to the variable display time table of the main control unit 81 is created on the effect control device 82 side. The variable display time may be grasped by the effect control device 82 based on the variable type counter CS.

<Suspension control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82>
Next, the suspension control process (step S1501) executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the pending control process is a process performed as part of various effect processes (FIG. 31) periodically executed by the effect control device 82, and when the pending display control command is received, Based on this, the display of the image for suspension is changed, and processing for performing a suspension notice is executed.

Here, the pending advance notice specifies information corresponding to the result of the validity judgment when the pending information is subject to the validity judgment at the timing before the acquired pending information becomes the target of the validity judgment. Based on the specified content, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 63, and the like notify the result of the suitability determination. More specifically, for example, as the suspension notice, based on the acquisition of suspension information that becomes a predetermined game result, the stop result of the game round before the game round for the suspension information is displayed as a predetermined symbol. It is an effect such as setting to be a combination (so-called chance eye), or making a predetermined character appear in a game round before the game round for the reserved information. In addition, for example, as a pending notice, using a pending image, a type of pending image corresponding to the game result of the corresponding pending information is displayed (for example, if the pending information is a jackpot result For example, a gold or red holding image is likely to be selected, and even if the result is an outlier, either reach display is performed. If the holding information is on hold, a green hold image is likely to be selected, and the reach display is not performed. Outgoing result If so, it is also applicable to effects such as predicting the game result before the start of the game round according to the type of the holding image, such as by making it easier to select a white holding image.

In the hold control process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received. A pending command received from the main control device 81 is stored in a command storage area 248 provided in the RAM 244 of the effect control device 82 . The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out from the previously stored commands. The process corresponding to the command can be executed at the execution timing of the effect of each command. At the time of determination in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area 248. FIG.

If a pending command has been received, in step S2602, a process of adding 1 to the number SN of secondary pending storage provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is executed. The secondary side reserved memory number SN corresponds to the common reserved number CRN on the side of the main controller 81 and reflects the total reserved number based on winnings to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 .

In subsequent step S2603, pending information comprehension processing is executed. In the hold information grasping process, the information included in the received hold command (game result information, fluctuation display time information, presence or absence of reach display, etc.) is grasped.

Then, in subsequent step S2604, processing for holding notice is executed. In the hold notice process, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold notice based on the received hold command (hold information acquired this time), and if the hold notice is executed, the game round is performed based on it. A process for changing the performance content and executing the pending notice is executed. The processing of steps S2603 and S2604 will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step S2605, a hold increase process is executed. In this processing, the light emission control of the pending light emitting units 45 and 46 is performed in accordance with the increase of the pending information, and a command corresponding to the increase of the pending information is output to the display control device 212 . This command includes information on the number SN of secondary pending storage and information on the details of the pending notice determined in step S2604. Based on the received command, the display control device 212 reads the data corresponding to the pending image corresponding to the content of the command from the pending image data storage area stored in the character ROM 276, and stores the data in the secondary pending storage number SN. The pattern display device 41 is controlled to display in the corresponding unit reserved display areas Ga1 to Ga4 and Gb1 to Gb4. For example, in a configuration in which a pending notice is given by using different pending images, the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 to display a pending notice corresponding to the pending notice, based on the received command. . As a result, the suspension notice using the suspension image is executed at a timing before the game round of the suspension information corresponding to the suspension image. After executing the process of step S2605, the hold control process ends.

On the other hand, if no hold command has been received in step S2601, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not a shift command has been received. If the shift command has not been received, the reservation control process is terminated, and if the shift command has been received, the secondary side reservation storage number SN is subtracted by 1 in step S2607. Then, in step S2608, a corresponding shift process is executed, and in step S2609, a pattern announcement process is executed. The processing of steps S2608 and S2609 will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S2609, shift processing is executed in step S2610. In the shift process, data in each storage area in the reserved storage area 270 is shifted.

That is, in the shift process, whether the shift command received this time corresponds to the validity determination of the reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra, or whether it is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. It is determined whether it corresponds to the validity determination of the reservation information. Then, the information stored in the secondary execution area 250c is erased, the information stored in the first area of the corresponding secondary reservation areas 250a and 250b is shifted to the secondary execution area 250c, and the second area → Various information stored in each area is shifted in the order of the first area, the third area→the second area, and the fourth area→the third area. Further, in the shift process, the light emission control of the pending light emitting units 45 and 46 is performed in accordance with the decrease of the pending information, and a command corresponding to the decrease of the pending information is output to the display control device 212 . The display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 to change the display of the corresponding unit reserved display areas Ga1 to Gs4 and Gb1 to Gb4 based on the received command. After executing the process of step S2610, the hold control process ends.

Next, the pending information grasping process in step S2603 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2701, the game result of the hold information related to the hold command received this time is grasped. Then, in step S2702, the game result ascertained in step S2701 is stored in the holding storage area 250. FIG. More specifically, it determines whether the received hold command is based on winning the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, Information on the game result and information on the variable display time are stored in an area in which win/fail judgment is executed. As already explained, the hold command may include information indicating that the hold number corresponding pattern is included as the information of the variable display time. In this case, when the hold command is received, the variable display time of the game cycle related to the hold command of this time is not fixed. Therefore, in step S2702, as the information to be stored in the storage area for suspension 250, not the information of the variable display time itself but the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of suspensions is stored.

In the subsequent step S2703, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time includes information that is a pattern corresponding to the number of holds. If the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is not included, in step S2704, the memory counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 correspond to the variation display time of the game cycle related to the currently received reservation command. After executing the process of adding the numerical value, the pending information grasping process is terminated. The storage counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to specify the total time of the variable display time of the pending information stored in each area of the pending storage area 250 . Also, the memory counter is decremented in accordance with the lapse of the variable display time each time a game round is completed. Specifically, in the variable display control process (FIG. 32), the process of subtracting the storage counter at predetermined intervals is performed. In other words, the storage counter stores the variable display time of the game rounds for the unspent pending information including the pending information acquired this time and the remaining time of the variable display time of the game rounds being executed as the total time of the variable display time. It corresponds to the combined time.

In step S2703, if the information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is included, in step S2705, after executing the processing of storing the corresponding flag in the various flag storage area 247 of the RAM 244, the reservation information grasping processing is executed. finish. The corresponding flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify that the pending information of the pending number corresponding pattern is stored in any area of the pending storage area 250 .

That is, in the hold information grasping process, the information on the game result of the received hold command and the information on the variable display time are stored in the corresponding areas of the hold storage area 250 . Also, if the variable display time can be specified, the storage counter is incremented in order to grasp the total time. On the other hand, when the variable display time cannot be specified, a correspondence flag is stored so that it can be specified that the information that cannot be specified is stored.

Next, the corresponding shift processing in step S2608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the pending information to be shifted to the secondary execution area 250c in the current shift process (step S2610) is information of a pattern corresponding to the number of pending. Specifically, of the first secondary reservation area 250a and the second secondary reservation area 250b, whether the reservation information of the area to be digested next stores information indicating that it is a pattern corresponding to the number of reservations. determine whether or not If it is not a pattern corresponding to the number of reservations, the shift processing for correspondence ends as it is.

If information indicating that it is a pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is included, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is included in another reservation area. If the other reservation area contains the reservation information of the pattern corresponding to the number of reservations, the shift processing for correspondence ends as it is. If the other area does not contain the pending information of the pattern corresponding to the pending number, and the pending information other than the pending information to be shifted to the secondary execution area 250c is the pending information that can specify the variable display time in advance After clearing the correspondence flag in step S2803, the correspondence shift processing is terminated.

Next, the suspension notice processing in step S2604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not a correspondence flag is stored. If the correspondence flag is stored, the suspension notice processing for the suspension image in steps S2902 to S2907 is not performed. The case where the corresponding flag is stored is, as already explained, the case where the stored hold information includes information whose variable display time cannot be specified in advance.

If it is determined in step S2901 that the correspondence flag is not stored, the process advances to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not the hold information related to the hold command received this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, a pattern advance notice lottery process for the jackpot is executed in step S2903. A pattern advance notice lottery process is executed. The lottery processing in steps S2903 and S2904 acquires lottery tables from the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, acquires lottery counters from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and stores the pending command received this time. A lottery as to whether or not to execute the symbol notice is performed with the image for reservation as the image for special reservation P2. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the symbol advance notice lottery process for big win is set higher than the probability of winning in the symbol advance notice lottery process for loss. It has a probability of 1% to be elected, and an outlier has a probability of 1% to be elected.

After executing the process of step S2903 or step S2904, it is determined whether or not the symbol announcement is won in step S2905. When winning, symbol determination processing is executed in step S2906.

Here, the symbol determination processing in step S2906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The symbol determination process in step S2906 has almost the same processing configuration as the big hit symbol determination process executed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 33). That is, the process for the first distribution member is performed in step S3001, and the process for the second distribution member is performed in step S3002. Based on the processing results of the first distribution member processing and the second distribution member processing, the symbols are determined in steps S3003 to S3007. The points of difference are that the processing configurations of the first distribution member processing and the second distribution member processing are different, and the processing of storing the stop line and address information in steps S1808 and S1809 are included. There is no point.

Differences between the first distribution member processing and the second distribution member processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 52 and 53 .

First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the pending command received this time corresponds to the big hit result. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, in step S3102, the type of the jackpot result of this time is grasped, and the processing of grasping the actual opening/closing time based on the type of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S1901.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that it corresponds to the result of deviation, then in step S3103 a provisional actual opening/closing time is determined by lottery. In step S3103, it is determined by lottery or the like which of the actual opening/closing times (102.5 sec, 76.5 sec, 50.5 sec, 24.5 sec) of each opening/closing execution mode is to be the provisional actual opening/closing time. In the lottery, a table for lottery is acquired from various table storage area 245 of ROM 243 and a counter for lottery is acquired from various counter area 249 of RAM 244 . For example, in the lottery table, the longer the change display time of the pending command received this time, the more likely a long actual opening/closing time is selected.

After executing the process of step S3102 or step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the actual opening/closing time ascertained/determined in step S3102 or S3103 is 102.5 sec. Such processing corresponds to the processing of step S1902.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, in step S3105, a process of grasping the total variable display time including the variable display time for the pending command received this time is executed. Specifically, a process of acquiring the value of the storage counter is performed.

The processing of steps S3106 to S3108 is processing of calculating the remainder when the total time of the variable display time grasped in step S3105 is divided by the operation cycle (80.0 sec) of the first distribution member 300. FIG.

That is, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the total time ascertained in step S3105 is shorter than the operating cycle of 80.0 sec. If a negative determination is made in step S3106, a process of subtracting the information corresponding to the operating cycle of 80.0 sec from the information corresponding to the total time is performed in step S3107, and whether or not the result of the processing is shorter than the operating cycle. is again determined in step S3106. Then, by making an affirmative determination in step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3108. In step S3108, a process of temporarily storing the information of the total time in the state of the affirmative determination in step S3106 as the information of the remaining time of the variable display time is performed.

In step S3109, a process of grasping the control state of the first distribution member 300 based on the information from the first role product command is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1904. Further, in step S3110, based on the result of determination in step S3109 and the operation period of the first distribution member 300, processing is performed to grasp the time until the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode next time. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1905.

In step S3111, a process of adding the opening time to the remainder of the variable display time temporarily stored in step S3108 is executed. Such processing corresponds to the processing in step S1906.

Then, in step S3112, it is determined whether or not the time added in step S3111 is equal to or longer than the time until the next V mode ascertained in step S3110. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110, in step S3113 is whether the time obtained by adding the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode to the time added in step S3111 includes the time up to the next V mode. It is determined whether or not, and if it is included, addition processing of V winning points VP is performed in step S3115. If not included, the process for the first distribution member is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3112, it is determined in step S3114 whether the time obtained by adding the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode to the time added to step S3111 includes the time up to the next V mode. If it is included, addition processing of V winning points VP is performed in step S3115. Further, even when the determination in step S3104 is affirmative, addition processing in step S3115 is performed.

Next, the processing for the second distribution member in step S3002 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not the pending command received this time corresponds to a big hit result. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, in step S3202, a process of grasping the actual opening/closing time is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that it corresponds to the result of deviation, then in step S3203 a provisional actual opening/closing time is determined by lottery. This process is the same as the process in step S3103.

After executing the process of step S3202 or step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, a process of grasping the total variable display time including the variable display time for the hold command received this time is executed.

The processing in steps S3205 to S3207 is processing for calculating the remainder when the total time of the variable display time grasped in step S3204 is divided by the operating cycle (600.0 sec) of the second distribution member 310. FIG.

That is, in step S3205, it is determined whether or not the total time ascertained in step S3204 is shorter than the operating cycle of 600.0 sec. If the determination in step S3205 is negative, in step S3206 processing is performed to subtract the information corresponding to the operating cycle of 600.0 sec from the information corresponding to the total time t, and whether or not the result of this processing is shorter than the operating cycle. is determined again in step S3205. Then, by making an affirmative determination in step S3205, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, a process of temporarily storing the information of the total time in the state of the affirmative determination in step S3207 as the information of the remaining time of the variable display time is performed.

In step S3208, a process of grasping the control state of the second distribution member 310 based on the information from the second role product command is performed. Further, in step S3209, based on the result of determination in step S3208 and the operation period of the second distribution member 310, processing is performed to grasp the time until the second distribution member 310 becomes the V mode next time.

In step S3210, a process of adding the opening time to the remainder of the variable display time temporarily stored in step S3207 is executed. Then, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the time added in step S3210 is equal to or longer than the time until the next V mode ascertained in step S3209. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3209, in step S3212 is whether the time obtained by adding the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode to the time added in step S3210 includes the time up to the next V mode? It is determined whether or not, and if it is included, addition processing of V winning points VP is performed in step S3214. If not included, the process for the first distribution member is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3211, it is determined in step S3213 whether the time obtained by adding the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode to the time added to step S3210 includes the time up to the next V mode. If it is included, addition processing of V winning points VP is performed in step S3214.

Returning to the description of the symbol determination processing (FIG. 51), after executing the first distribution member processing and the second distribution member processing in steps S3001 and S3002, in step S3003, V winning points VP 2 or not. If it is 2, in step S3004, the symbol of the symbol announcement this time is determined as the first specific symbol numbered 3 or 7, and this symbol determination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3003, it is determined whether or not the V winning point VP is 1 in step S3005. If it is 1, in step S3006, the symbol of this symbol announcement is determined as the second specific symbol with an odd number other than 3 and 7, and this symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined not to be 1 at step S3005, at step S3007, the symbol of this symbol announcement is determined as a non-specific symbol with an even number, and this symbol determination process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reservation notice process (FIG. 50), after the symbol determination process is executed in step S2906, the process of setting the symbol notice is executed in step S2907. In this process, a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the special hold image P2 reflecting the design determined in step S2906 is displayed. The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 273 the data table for performing the suspension notice by the image for suspension of the received command in the pattern display device 41, and the image data of the image for suspension corresponding to the data table is read from the character ROM 276. It reads out and outputs the image data to the VDP 275 as a drawing list. As a result, in the pattern display device 41, the suspension notice by the suspension image determined by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 is executed.

If the corresponding flag is stored in step S2901, if a negative determination is made in step S2905, or after the processing of step S2907 is executed, other advance notice processing is executed in step S2908, and then the pending notice end the processing. In other notice processing, processing for performing hold notice (for example, background change, continuous notice, etc.) using other than the hold image is executed based on the hold command received this time.

Next, the symbol notice process of step S3009 in the hold control process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the symbol announcement process is a process that is executed based on the reception of the shift command.

Here, as described above, the symbol notice is performed in a situation in which the variable display time of the stored pending information can be specified in advance. Then, the content of the symbol notice is determined based on the specified total time of the variable display time. However, the total time of the variable display time may change after the start of the symbol advance notice. That is, it is a case where the reservation information based on the winning to the lower operation opening 34 is acquired as the reservation information on the priority side. Specifically, since the pending information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is digested with priority over the pending information based on the winning to the upper working port 33 (see FIG. 20), the symbol notice is 33, and the suspension based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 after the start of the design notice and before the start of the game round of the hold information about the design notice. When the information is acquired, the total time of the variable display time referred to in the symbol notice becomes different. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the total time is different when the hold information is shifted, it is configured to be corrected. Processing for that will be described below.

That is, as shown in FIG. 54, first, in step S3301, a process of subtracting from the storage counter a numerical value corresponding to the variable display time of the pending information to be shifted to the execution area 250c by the current shift command is performed. Then, in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the symbol announcement is being executed. If the symbol announcement is not being executed, the process for symbol announcement is terminated as it is. When the symbol notice is being executed, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not the pending information to be shifted to the execution area 250c this time is the pending information on the priority side. If it is not the reserved information on the priority side, the process for symbol notice is terminated as it is.

When the pending information to be shifted to the execution area 250c this time is the pending information on the priority side, the symbol determination process is executed in step S3304. The pattern determination process is the same as the process in FIG. Based on this, the process of determining the pattern is executed.

At step S3305, the symbol in the symbol notice being executed is compared with the symbol determined at step S3304, and it is determined whether or not the symbol will be demoted. Specifically, when the symbol notice being executed is the first specific symbol, it is determined that the demotion will occur if the symbol in step S3304 is the second specific symbol or the non-specific symbol. Also, when the symbol notice being executed is the second specific symbol, it is determined that the symbol in step S3304 is a non-specific symbol and that the demotion will occur. That is, if a symbol showing a lower V winning rate than the symbol being executed is determined in step S3304, it is determined that demotion will occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S3305, that is, if it is determined that the symbol will not be demoted, it is determined in step S3306 whether or not the symbol will be promoted. Specifically, when the symbol notice being executed is a non-specific symbol, it is determined that promotion will occur if the symbol in step S3304 is the first specific symbol or the second specific symbol. Further, when the symbol notice being executed is the second specific symbol, it is determined that the symbol in step S3304 is the first specific symbol and that the promotion will occur. That is, if a symbol indicating a higher V winning rate than the symbol being executed is determined in step S3304, it is determined that promotion will occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S3306, that is, if the symbol of the symbol announcement being executed and the symbol determined in step S3304 are the same, the process for this symbol announcement ends as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, in step S3307, the symbol change process is executed, and then the process for this symbol notice is terminated. In the symbol change process, display control is performed on the display control device 212 so that the type of the special hold image P2 in the symbol notice being executed is changed to the type corresponding to the symbol determined in step S3304.

When it is determined in step S3305 that the symbol will be demoted, in step S3308, after executing a symbol notice cancellation process, this symbol notice process is terminated. In the symbol notice cancellation process, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the symbol notice being executed is canceled and the displayed special reservation image P2 is changed to the normal reservation image P1.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the time of acquisition of suspension information, the variation display time of the game round for the suspension information and the variation display time for the suspension information stored in the suspension storage area 250 , the remaining time of the variable display time of the game round being executed, the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing execution mode, and the control state of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310, based on the acquired hold information It is possible to specify information such as whether or not a V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode triggered. As a result, for example, it is possible to predict in advance that it is likely to shift to the high-probability mode before the game round that triggers the opening/closing execution mode that shifts to the high-probability mode is executed. games can be provided.

In addition, when the total time of the variable display time is changed, such as when the hold information on the priority side is acquired, the design is configured to be able to be corrected, so there is a contradiction between the content of the design notice and the V winning rate. Such inconveniences can be avoided. In this case, when the design is modified, if the design is demoted, the design notice itself is canceled. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disappointed when the pattern notice is different from the expected transition to the high-probability mode. On the other hand, when the pattern is promoted, since the correction of the pattern is allowed, it is possible to fully enjoy the state that the pattern notice is promoted step by step to the higher V winning rate side. .

In addition, it is more preferable that the event of canceling the previous notice of the symbol and the event of promotion occurring in the previous notice of the symbol described above occur in terms of performance. Specifically, the design notice (particularly, the pattern notice based on the result of the loss) is canceled with a predetermined probability at the time of shift. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the cancellation of the symbol advance notice is caused by the demotion of the symbol. It should be noted that it is preferable to increase the probability that the design advance notice is canceled for the sake of presentation when shifting the hold information on the priority side than when shifting the hold information on the non-priority side. In this way, it becomes the same as the configuration of the above-described embodiment, which is observed at the time of shift of the hold information on the priority side. It is possible to make it difficult to understand from the appearance.

In addition, in the design notice, for example, at a predetermined rate when it is determined that the design notice by the first specific pattern is performed, first, the pattern notice by the non-specific pattern is performed, and at each shift, the non-specific pattern → the second specific pattern → As in the case of the first specific symbol, promotion of the symbol may occur in the performance. In this way, the frequency with which the symbol is promoted can be increased.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening time of each round is set to be shorter than the product of the launch period and the upper limit winning number, so that each round can easily end at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, the opening time of each round can be longer than the product of the launch period and the maximum winning number.

FIG. 55 shows a sorting table for the second result display section in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B are set as the 16R jackpot results for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot result A is the same as the 16R jackpot result in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a game result in which a round game with an opening time of 5 seconds is executed over 16 rounds to the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, the 16R jackpot result B is a round game in which the opening time is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the product of the firing period and the upper limit number of winning prizes. It is a game result of shifting to the opening and closing execution mode in which the round game of 1 sec is executed over 3 rounds.

Comparing the 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the 16R jackpot result A, about 8 game balls can be expected to win prizes in one round, and about 1920 prize balls are paid out in total. can be expected. On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot result B, winning of 10 game balls, which is the maximum winning number, can be expected in the 1st to 13th rounds, while winning of game balls is expected in the 14th to 16th rounds. Can not. Therefore, about 1950 prize balls can be expected to be paid out in total. In other words, the 16R big win result A and the 16R big win result B have almost the same number of prize balls.

By the way, in this embodiment, in the symbol determination process for the big hit (FIG. 35), in the process of grasping the actual opening/closing time (step S1901, step S2001) of each sorting member process (step S1801, step S1802), The actual opening/closing time based on the 16R jackpot result B is calculated as 412.8 sec (30.0 sec x 13 + 0.1 sec x 3 + 1.5 sec x 15). In addition, in step S1902, affirmative determination is made (proceeding to step S1909) even when the grasped actual opening/closing time is 412.8 sec.

The opening/closing process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. If the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" at step S3402, and whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0" at step S3403. judge.

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or if the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the 16R jackpot result B. If the determination in step S3404 is affirmative, it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the round counter RC is 1 to 3, that is, whether or not the round game to be started is the 14th to 16th rounds. . If a negative determination is made in step S3405, that is, if it is the 1st to 13th rounds, "7500" (30 sec) is input to the timer counter TC in step S3406. If the determination in step S3405 is affirmative, "25" (0.1 sec) is input to the timer counter TC in step S3407.

If a negative determination is made in step S3404, "1250" (5 sec) is input to the timer counter TC in step S3408. After executing any of the processes of steps S3406 to S3408, the opening process of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed in step S3409. Then, in step S3410, "10", which is the upper limit winning number, is input to the winning counter PC, and in step S3411, an opening command is set, and then the opening/closing process ends.

When the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state at step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3412 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined in step S3413 whether a game ball has won the accessory device 150 or not. If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S3414. If not, the main opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0" at step S3415 and the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls occurs, the upper limit winning command is set at step S3416. The upper limit prize winning command is a command for making the effect control device 82 grasp that the end condition of the winning side of the upper limit winning number among the end conditions of the round game is established and the round game ends. The upper limit winning command is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. Processing on the effect control device 82 side will be described later in detail.

When the value of the timer counter TC is "0" in step S3412 and the open time has passed, or after the process of step S3416 is executed, the accessory device 150 is closed in step S3417. The processing of subsequent steps S3418 to S3423 is the same as the processing of steps S1013 to S1018 described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the opening/closing execution mode processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing for the opening and closing execution mode is processing performed as part of various processing for effects periodically activated by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 (step S1503).

First, in step S3501, an opening command has been received, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute an opening effect. When it is time to execute the opening effect, the process advances to step S3502 to execute the opening effect setting process, and then the opening/closing execution mode process ends. In the opening effect setting process, the opening effect table is read from the various table storage area 245, and various devices are controlled so as to perform the opening effect corresponding to the type of opening/closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time. Also, in the opening effect setting process, a command including information on the content of the opening effect to be set this time is output to the display control device 212 . The display control device 212 reads out from the program ROM 273 the data table for performing the effect of the received command on the pattern display device 41, and every time the predetermined image update timing comes according to the data table (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). ), and outputs a drawing list to the VDP 275 . As a result, the pattern display device 41 executes an effect according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the process advances to step S3503. In step S3503, a close command has been received, and it is determined whether or not it is time to update the round. If it is not the update timing, the process proceeds to step S3504, the ending command is received, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the ending effect. When it is time to execute the ending effect, the ending effect setting process of step S3505 is executed, and then the opening/closing execution mode process is terminated. In the ending effect setting process, the ending effect table is read out from the various table storage area 245, and the effect corresponding to the type of mode (high or low of win/fail lottery mode, high or low of support mode) set after the end of the opening/closing execution mode this time is performed. to control various devices. Also, in the ending effect setting process, a command including information on the content of the ending effect to be set this time is output to the display control device 212 . The processing on the display control device 212 side is as described above. If a negative determination is made in step S3504, the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503 and it is time to update the round, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, it is determined whether or not an upper limit winning command has been received. That is, it is determined whether the end of the round game this time is based on the occurrence of the maximum winning number or based on the lapse of the opening time. If it is based on the lapse of the open time, in step S3507 normal round update processing is executed, and then the open/close execution mode processing is terminated. In step S3507, the round effect table is read out from the various table storage area 245, and based on the information of the number of rounds included in the closing command, a round effect including the number of the round to be started next is performed. to control various devices. Also, in the round update process of step S3507, a command including information on the content of the round effect set this time is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The processing on the display control device 212 side is as described above.

In step S3506, if it is based on the occurrence of the winning of the maximum winning number, the process proceeds to step S3508. In step S3508, it is determined whether or not V winning has already occurred in the current open/close execution mode. It should be noted that when the occurrence of the V prize is specified in the process for transition to the high probability mode in the main control device 81 (step S1101: YES), a command including that information is configured to be output to the effect control device 82, The above determination may be made based on the command.

If it is determined in step S3508 that the V prize has already been won, the process advances to step S3507 to execute normal round update processing, and then the open/close execution mode processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3508 that the V prize has not been won, the symbol correction process is executed in step S3509, and then the opening/closing execution mode process is terminated.

In other words, when the round game ends with the winning of the maximum winning number, the round ends in a time shorter than the predetermined opening time. Then, at the start of the opening/closing execution mode (more specifically, at the start of the game cycle that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode), the actual opening/closing time used for determining the symbols is changed. Therefore, in this case, when the actual opening/closing time is changed, the design is corrected in the next round. The symbol correction processing for symbol correction will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the pattern correction process, the process for the first distribution member is executed in step S3601, and the process for the second distribution member is executed in step S3602.

In the first distribution member processing in step S3601, as shown in FIG. 59, in step S3701, processing for grasping the remaining actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The MPU 242 can grasp the actual opening/closing time by specifying the type of opening/closing execution mode being executed and the number of rounds to be updated this time. In step S3702, the control state of the first distribution member 300 is grasped from the information of the first accessory command. Then, in step S3703, the remaining time until the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode next is calculated.

In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the remaining actual opening/closing time ascertained in step S3701 includes the remaining time until the V mode ascertained in step S3703. If it is included, a process of adding 1 to the V winning point VP is executed in step S3705. If a negative determination is made in step S3704, or if the process of step S3705 has been executed, the first distribution member process ends.

In the second distribution member processing in step S3602, as shown in FIG. 60, in step S3801, processing for grasping the remaining actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In step S3802, the control state of the second distribution member 310 is grasped from the information of the second accessory command. Then, in step S3803, the remaining time until the second distribution member 310 becomes the V mode next is calculated.

In step S3804, it is determined whether or not the remaining actual opening/closing time ascertained in step S3801 includes the remaining time until the V mode ascertained in step S3803. If it is included, a process of adding 1 to the V winning point VP is executed in step S3805. If a negative determination is made in step S3804, or if the process of step S3805 has been executed, the process for the second distribution member ends.

Returning to the description of the pattern correction process (FIG. 58), after executing the processes of steps S3601 and S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the V winning point VP is two. If it is 2, in step S3604, after setting the symbol after correction to the first specific symbol of 3 or 7, the symbol correction process is terminated. In this case, at the start of the round game or during the waiting time between rounds, the pattern that was stopped in the game round that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time was corrected to the first specific pattern (originally the first Display control of the display control device 212 is performed so that the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 shows an effect indicating that the state of the specific pattern is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S3603, it is determined whether or not the V winning point VP is 1 in step S3605. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S3606, and the symbol stopped in the game round before correction, that is, the game cycle that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (or the symbol corrected last time) is the first specific symbol. Determine whether or not there was When there is the first specific symbol, the process proceeds to step S3607, and the process of grasping the hold information stored in each area of the hold storage area 250 is executed. Then, in step S3608, based on the grasped result in step S3607, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is included. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode continues after the current opening/closing execution mode. In the case where the opening and closing execution mode is continuous, even if V winning does not occur in the subsequent round game, the same phenomenon as in the high probability mode (immediately resulting in a jackpot) occurs. , the process advances to step S3604 to perform the process of correcting the pattern to the first specific pattern, and then ends the pattern correction process. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the event that the symbols are demoted.

When a negative determination is made in step S3606 or step S3608, in step S3609, the process of correcting the pattern to the second specific pattern is performed, and then this pattern correction process is terminated. In this case, at the start of the round game or during the waiting time between rounds, the pattern that was stopped in the game round that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time was corrected to the second specific pattern (originally the second Display control of the display control device 212 is performed so that the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 shows an effect indicating that the state of the specific pattern is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S3605, it is determined in step S3610 whether it was any of the specific symbols before correction. When it is one of the specific symbols, confirmation processing of the reservation information is executed in step S3611, and it is determined whether or not the reservation information corresponding to the jackpot result is included in the reservation information in step S3612. . The processing of steps S3611 and S3612 is the same as the processing of steps S3607 and S3608. Then, when the affirmative determination is made in step S3612, the process of correcting the design to the first specific design is performed in step S3604, and then the design correction process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3610 or step S3612, then in step S3613 the symbol is corrected to a non-specific symbol, and then the symbol correction process is terminated. In this case, at the start of the round game and during the waiting time between rounds, the pattern that was stopped in the game round that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time was corrected to a non-specific pattern (originally a non-specific pattern The display control device 212 performs display control so that the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 shows an effect indicating that the state is maintained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the 16R jackpot result B, there is a case where the maximum number of prizes is won during the open/close execution mode, and the round game is terminated/updated. Therefore, the V winning rate may be different from the V winning rate corresponding to the symbol announced in the game cycle. When the first specific symbols are stopped and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the player recognizes that the V winning rate is high considering the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode. In that case, it is considered that the V prize is generated so as not to change the actual opening/closing time as much as possible. Specifically, for example, game balls that are just the maximum winning number are awarded, and the round is updated after the opening time has elapsed without generating the winning of the maximum winning number. After the V prize is generated, the game is played so as to generate the maximum number of prizes to be won. In this way, even if the first specific symbol is stopped, the game is not performed in the open/close execution mode without worrying about the game, but the game is performed such that the game ball is shot so that the V prize is surely generated. It is possible to add a new enjoyment of the opening and closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, the symbols are basically corrected to the symbols on the side where the V winning rate is low. Therefore, the game in this embodiment can be said to be a game in which the number of prizes won during the open/close execution mode is adjusted so that the V prize rate does not decrease.

In the 16R big win result A and the 16R big win result B, substantially the same number of prize balls are put out. As a result, it is possible to realize new playability without changing the number of balls obtained during one open/close execution mode. In addition, for example, even if the player himself/herself can select the 16R jackpot result A and the 16R jackpot result B after the jackpot, the actual advantage is not changed. The player can make a selection between (A) the previously reported result is not changed, and (B) the reported result can be changed for the 16R jackpot result B).

For example, the 16R big win result B may have fewer balls than the 16R big win result A, or vice versa. Also, by varying the number of rounds or the maximum winning number, it is possible to set the number of balls to be put out more or less. In the opening/closing execution mode in which the player can intervene during the opening/closing execution mode, such as the 16R jackpot result B, it is considered that the intervention increases the interest of the player. It can be said that it is possible to draw attention to the opening/closing execution mode even if the opening/closing execution mode is not required. Therefore, there is an advantage in reducing the number of balls put out in the open/close execution mode in which the player can intervene, also from the viewpoint of not increasing the put-out rate too much. In addition, as described above, when it is reported that the V winning rate is high, it is conceivable that a game is played to prevent the occurrence of the maximum winning number. It is conceivable that the number of balls put out (actual number of balls put out) is smaller than the number of balls put out (assumed number of balls put out) when the maximum number of winnings is generated. In this case, even if the number of balls put out in the opening/closing execution mode (assumed balls put out) that can be intervened is increased, it is expected that the put out rate will not substantially improve as much as the assumed put out balls, and a rise in the put out rate can be suppressed. becomes possible.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, it is reported in which round the V prize is likely to occur.

FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the opening effect setting process. The opening effect setting process is a process executed in step S3502 of the opening/closing execution mode process (FIG. 57).

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not any of the specific symbols has been stopped in the game cycle that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode this time. The case where the specific pattern is stopped means that at least in the pattern determination process for the big win, it is determined that the V mode by the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 overlaps during the opening and closing execution mode this time. . Therefore, in step S3902, in which round the V mode overlaps is determined based on the opening/closing pattern of the current opening/closing execution mode and the control states of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310. do. Then, in step S3903, the V prize suggesting effect for each round is set, with the rounds in which V prizes are likely to occur grasped in step S3902 as target rounds and the other rounds as normal rounds. When a negative determination is made in step S3901, or after the process of step S3903 is executed, the process of setting the opening effect is executed in step S3904, and the opening effect setting process ends. The opening effect set in step S3904 includes the V winning suggestion effect set in step S3903. That is, in the V prize suggesting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(c), a display such as "6R and 10R are the target!" is displayed as an opening effect to indicate the target round.

Further, in the open/close execution mode processing, if it is time to update the round, as shown in FIG. In step S4002, the normal round effect is set, and if it is the target round, the target round effect is set in step S4003, and then the opening/closing execution mode processing is terminated. In the normal round production, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(d), a production is performed in which a girl is displayed, and in the target round production, for example, as shown in FIG. Perform the displayed effect.

In this way, the player can clearly grasp the round in which the V prize is likely to occur, and the degree of attention to the round can be greatly increased.

Note that the above configuration may be applied to the fifth embodiment. For example, in the case of the 16R jackpot result B, if the round in which the V prize is likely to occur is early in the actual ball, the maximum winning number is not generated until that round, and the V prize is generated. If the easy round is a slow round, it is possible to play a game in which the upper limit winning number is generated for a while and the result of pattern correction is waited to prepare for the V winning.

The process of specifying the round in which the V prize is likely to occur may be performed in the symbol determination process for the big win. Then, the selected symbol may be associated with the round in which the V prize is likely to occur. In this case, for example, when the V winning is likely to occur in the early round, the first specific symbol is made to be easily selected, and when the V winning is likely to occur in the late round, the non-specific symbols are selected. It is preferable that the pattern is selected. When the first specific symbol is stopped, in order not to cause a contradiction due to a change in the actual opening/closing time, etc., it is preferable that the V winning occurs early and the transition to the high probability mode is confirmed, and the non-specific symbol is This is because, when the game is stopped, it is preferable to have the player intervene so that the V prize is likely to occur in many rounds.

As a configuration for determining the symbols by the round in which V winning is likely to occur as described above, for example, it is configured to perform the above target round grasping process at the start of the game round, and in the symbol determining process for the big win (Fig. 35) If the determination in step S1805 is affirmative, that is, if the V winning point VP is 1, it is determined whether or not the target round is an early round (for example, 1 to 3R). Then, if the early round is the target round, the process of setting the first specific pattern in step S1804 is performed, and if the round is not the early round, the process of setting the second specific pattern is performed in step S1806. .

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable display time of the current game round is determined based on the control states of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 at the start of the game round. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing processing for setting the variable display time in this embodiment.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not there is any jackpot result. If the result is a big win, a process for setting a variation display time for a big win is executed in step S4102. If it is not a jackpot result in step S4101, it is determined whether reach occurs in step S4103, and the process of referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table in step S4104, or the reach non-occurrence fluctuation in step S4105 Execute one of the processes that refer to the display time table.

After executing the processing of step S4102, step S4104, or step S4105, the processing of setting the variable display time is executed in step S4106, and then the processing of setting the variable display time ends.

The process of setting the variable display time for the big win in step S4102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4201, a process of grasping the values of the first role product counter YK1 and the second role product counter YK2 is executed. In step S4202, the period until YK1=10000 and YK2=130000 is grasped with YK1 and YK2 as predetermined values.

In step S4203, it is determined whether the period ascertained in step S4202 is 30 seconds or longer. If it is 30 sec or more, in step S4204, the period ascertained in step S4202 is determined as the variable display time of the current game round. In step S4204, it is determined as the variable display time of the current game round. After executing the process of step S4204, this setting process ends. The variable display time determined in step S4204 is set as the variable display time of the game round in step S4106.

By doing so, the states of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode are unified into the states of YK1=10000 and YK2=130000.

In the process for the first distribution member in the symbol determination process for the jackpot on the effect control device 82 side, as shown in FIG. Determine whether it is a result. If the result is a jackpot result other than the 4R jackpot result, the processing for adding 1 to the V winning prize point VP is performed in step S4302, and then the first distribution member processing is terminated. If the result is a 4R jackpot, the process for the first distribution member is terminated without performing the V winning point addition process.

In the process for the second distribution member in the symbol determination process for the big win, as shown in FIG. 64(b), it is determined in step S4401 whether the result is the 4R big win or the 8R big win. In the case of a jackpot result other than the 4R jackpot result and the 8R jackpot result, the V prize points VP are added in step S4402, and then the second distribution member processing ends. In the case of a 4R jackpot result or an 8R jackpot result, the process for the second distribution member is terminated without performing the process of adding the V prize points VP.

The relationship between the states of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode and each opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 64(c).

As described above, the variable display time of the game round is the timing when the first role counter YK1 of the first distribution member 300 reaches 10000 and the second role counter YK2 of the second distribution member 310 reaches 130000. It is set so that the game cycle ends. That is, one operating cycle of the first distributing member 300 ends 40 seconds after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and one operating cycle of the second distributing member 310 ends 80 seconds after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. is set to In this case, in the opening/closing execution modes other than the 4-round opening/closing execution mode, the actual opening/closing time and the timing at which the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode overlap, and the opening/closing execution modes other than the 4-round and 8-round opening/closing execution modes In the mode, the actual opening/closing time overlaps with the timing when the second distribution member 310 is in the V mode.

As a result, without changing the operation timing of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 that operate periodically, the operation of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 and the opening/closing operation can be performed. It is possible to associate with the V winning rate in the execution mode.

In this case, the V winning rate can be grasped only from the information on the main control device 81 side without performing the calculation processing (symbol determination processing for big win) in the effect control device 82 as in each of the above embodiments. Therefore, not only the symbols to be stopped on the symbol display device 41 but also the symbols to be stopped on the main display section 43 can be associated with the V winning rate.

This embodiment can also be modified as follows. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing processing for setting the opening period in this modification. As already explained, the opening period setting process is a process executed in step S906 in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). In the present embodiment, the stop symbols (the stop symbols of the main display section 43 and the symbol display device 41) of the game round to shift to the opening/closing execution mode are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, the symbols stopped on the main display unit 43 and the symbols stopped on the sub-side symbol display device 41 are associated with each other. Specifically, the main control device 81 side determines the stop pattern, and the effect control device 82 sets the stop pattern of the pattern display device 41 based on it.

In step S4501, a process of grasping the position of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, a process of grasping the first accessory counter YK1 is executed. In the subsequent step S4502, a process of ascertaining the position of the second distribution member 310 is executed. In the subsequent step S4503, a process of grasping the stop symbol is executed. That is, the process of grasping the symbol stopped on the main display section 43 is executed. In the subsequent step S4504, it is determined whether or not the symbol stopped on the main display portion 43 is the symbol corresponding to the first specific symbol. If it corresponds to the first specific pattern, in step S4505, both the timing when the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode and the timing when the second distribution member 310 becomes the V mode. exists during the actual opening/closing time of the current opening/closing execution mode, and the setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4504 that it does not correspond to the first specific symbol, it is determined in step S4506 whether or not it corresponds to the second specific symbol. If it corresponds to the second specific symbol, in step S4507, either the timing when the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode or the timing when the second distribution member 310 becomes the V mode. exists during the actual opening/closing time of the current opening/closing execution mode, and the setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S4506 that it corresponds to a non-specific pattern, in step S4508, the timing when the first distribution member 300 becomes the V mode and the second distribution member 310 becomes the V mode. The length of the opening time is set so that neither of the timing and the timing exists during the actual opening/closing time of the current opening/closing execution mode, and this setting process ends.

That is, in the above embodiment, the variable display time of game rounds is set according to the control state of each distribution member 300, 310 to set the V winning rate. The V winning rate is set by setting according to the control state of the dividing members 300 and 310 . In this way, it is not necessary to grasp the control state of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 at the time of execution of the game round, and at the start timing of the game round when various effects are likely to be set. A local increase in processing load can be avoided. Also, at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the V winning rate can be adjusted to the content (stopped pattern) notified earlier than that, so that only the opening/closing execution mode based on the lottery of the numerical information included in the reserved information can be used. Instead, it is possible to deal with various modes of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, such as generation of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ball entering a predetermined ball entering portion.

<Eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game board 24 is different from the above embodiments.

FIG. 66 is a front view showing the game board 24 in this embodiment.

The game board 24 in this embodiment is not provided with the accessory device 150 . Instead, a plurality of variable ball entry devices are provided that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter or cannot be entered than in the open state. Specifically, a first variable winning device 341 is provided in the left region PE2, and a second variable winning device 342 is provided in the right region PE3. Since the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342 have the same configuration, only the first variable winning device 341 will be described below.

67(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the first variable winning device 341 as seen from the side, and FIG. 67(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the first variable winning device 341 as seen from the rear side. be.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the first variable winning device 341 is formed with a distribution entrance 351 that is open in the front-rear direction and is large enough for game balls to pass through. A distribution member 352 is provided for switching between a closed state in which balls cannot pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 353 for the distribution entrance. The distribution entrance 351 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game balls flowing in from the distribution entrance 351 flow down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 355 forming the upstream side of the branching position and a downstream region of the branching position. V winning area (or useful area) 356, and discharge area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other on the downstream side of the branch position. In addition, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have reached the branch position from the upstream region 355 to either the V winning region 356 or the discharge region 357 . When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter driving section 359, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter driving section 359, The game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 356 .

The shutter 358 corresponds to the distribution members 300 and 310 in each of the embodiments described above. That is, the shutter 358 is switched between the V mode in which game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356 and the off mode in which game balls are distributed to the discharge area 357 at a predetermined operation cycle after the power is turned on.

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which game balls that have flowed into the upstream area 355 always pass. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 361 for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first variable prize winning device 341 is executed. In addition, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, the success/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode.

In addition, a detection sensor 363 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the area 357 for ejection always passes. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 363 for discharge and the detection sensor 362 for V winning, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the first variable winning device 341 .

Although detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, the shutter 358 is controlled by the shutter control process periodically activated by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 to switch between the V mode and the off mode at a predetermined operation cycle. Switching control is performed. As in the above-described embodiments, the switching control of the shutter 358 is executed regardless of the progress of the opening/closing execution mode. The operating cycle of the shutter 358 may be the same operating cycle between the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342, or may be different operating cycles.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing opening/closing processing in this embodiment.

In the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment, opening/closing is performed multiple times by the first variable winning device 341 or the second variable winning device 342 during one round. Then, when the total opening/closing time (total opening/closing time) of both variable prize winning devices 341 and 342 reaches a predetermined time, or when the total number of prizes won to both variable prize winning devices 341 and 342 (sum of the number of prizes won) When the predetermined number is reached, it is determined that the conditions for ending one round are satisfied, and the round is updated.

Specifically, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not one of the variable winning devices 341 and 342 is in the open state. If neither of the variable winning devices 341, 342 is in the open state, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S4602, and the value of the timer counter TC is set to "0" in step S4603. ” is determined.

If the value of the round counter RC is "0" or if the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the flow advances to step S4604 to determine by lottery which of the variable winning devices 341 and 342 should be open. determined by In the subsequent step S4605, it is determined whether or not the first variable prize winning device 341 is opened based on the result of the lottery in step S4604. When the first variable prize winning device 341 is set to the open state, in step S4606, the drive unit 353 of the first variable prize winning device 341 is driven and controlled to permit the winning of the first variable prize winning device 341. and On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4605 that the second variable winning device 342 is to be opened, in step S4607, the drive unit 353 of the second variable winning device 342 is controlled to drive the second variable winning device 342. It is in a state where winning a prize is permitted.

After executing the process of step S4606 or step S4607, the process of inputting "825" (3.3 sec) to the timer counter TC is executed in step S4608. The value input in step S4608 corresponds to the unit opening time corresponding to one opening, not the total opening time during one round. Then, in step S4609, a process of subtracting 1 from the open counter OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The open counter OC is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the number of openings in one round, and is a counter to which a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment) is input when updating one round.

In the following step S4610, "10" is input to the winning counter PC, and in step S4611, an opening command is set, and the opening/closing process ends.

If any of the variable winning devices 341 and 342 are open in step S4601, the process proceeds to step S4612. In step S4612, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", whether or not the game ball has won the first variable winning device 341 or the second variable winning device 342 in step S4613 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor 361 for counting. judge. If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S4614, and then it is determined in step S4615 whether or not the value of the prize counter PC is "0". If not, the main opening/closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is "0" at step S4615, a process is executed to close the variable winning devices 341 and 342 which are open at step S4616.

If the value of the timer counter TC is "0" in step S4612 and the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4617. In step S4617, it is assumed that one unit opening time in one round has passed, and processing is executed to close the variable winning devices 341 and 342 that are in the open state. Then, in step S4618, update processing of the open counter OC is executed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the open counter OC is executed. In subsequent step S4619, it is determined whether or not the open counter OC is zero. If it is not 0, the opening/closing process is terminated as it is.

If the open counter OC is 0 in step S4619, or if the value of the winning counter PC is "0" in step S4616 and the closing process is executed based on the occurrence of the upper limit number of winnings, the round It means that the termination condition of is satisfied. In this case, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1 in step S4620, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S4621. If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", interval setting processing is executed in step S4622. Then, in step S4623, a process of inputting 2 to the open counter OC is executed, and in step S4624, a closing command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends.

If it is determined in step S4621 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", then in step S4625 the ending process is executed, and in step S4626 the ending command is set. End the process.

As described above, in this embodiment, in one round, the opening of either the first variable winning device 341 or the second variable winning device 342 is regarded as one unit opening, and the unit opening is performed multiple times. is executed twice. A unit opening time (3.3 sec) is set for each unit opening, and the unit opening ends when the unit opening time elapses. Here, the total unit open time during one round is set to be longer than the product (6.0 sec) of the firing period and the maximum winning number. On the other hand, one unit opening time is set to be shorter than the product of the firing period and the maximum winning number. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the player cannot or hardly grasps which one of the first variable prize winning device 341 and the second variable prize winning device 342 is opened when each unit is released. In other words, in order to generate the winning of the maximum winning number of game balls, the player predicts which of the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342 will be opened, and shoots the game balls. If this prediction is correct, it is possible to win the upper limit winning number of game balls and end the round.

Here, as shown in the fifth embodiment, when the maximum winning number is won and the round is ended, the actual opening/closing time is changed, and the subsequent V winning rate may change. Also, when the round ends after the total opening time has elapsed without winning the upper limit winning number, the actual opening/closing time is not changed, and the V winning rate does not change after that. In other words, if the player's prediction is correct and the player wins the upper limit number of prizes, it is possible to change the V winning rate after that, and the above prediction is wrong or intentionally wins the upper limit number of prizes. does not occur, the subsequent V prize rate does not change.

In this way, by applying the configuration that changes the V winning rate using the success or failure of the end condition based on the upper limit winning number in each round to the configuration that enables winning by hitting different game balls, the player's It is possible to create a novel game that requires intervention.

Here, even if it is desired to change the V winning rate, if the predictions of the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342 are correct, the winning of the maximum winning number can occur. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the game regardless of the player's level of skill in the game by including the element of lottery while allowing the player's intervention.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a new playability is realized by modifying the suspension notice in the fourth embodiment. Modifications of the suspension notice in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 69 is a variable display time table for reach occurrence in this embodiment. In this embodiment, even when reach occurs, the variable display time is set to differ according to the common number of reservations CRN. In this embodiment, the larger the common pending number CRN at the start of the game cycle, the shorter the variable display time is set. The common pending number CRN increases based on winnings in the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and decreases each time the game cycle is completed. , and the variable display time set at the start of the game cycle may differ. Note that the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence in this embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 0 to 99) and holding number corresponding information (CS=100 to 199) in which the variable display time varies according to the common holding number CRN.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing pending command setting processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the pending command setting process is one process (information acquisition process, Step S306 in FIG. 17).

In this embodiment, the game result is grasped in step S4701. In the following step S4702, information as to whether or not reach occurs is grasped, and in step S4703, the current pending number is grasped. In the following step S4704, a variable display time table corresponding to the grasped results in steps S4701 to S4703 is obtained. Then, in step S4705, the variable display time that can be set by the number of pending at the present time is grasped. In step S4706, a process of setting the game result information and the variable display time information to the pending command is executed. After executing the process of step S4706, the pending command setting process ends.

In the hold control process of this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 71, if a hold command is received in step S4801, the secondary side hold storage number SN is added in step S4802. Then, in step S4802, hold information comprehension processing is executed. The processing of steps S4801 and S4802 is the same as the processing of steps S2601 and S2602 described above.

In the pending information grasping process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, a process of grasping the game result is executed in step S4901, and a process of storing the game result in the reserve area is executed in step S4902. The processing in steps S4901 and S4902 is the same as the processing in steps S2701 and S2702 described above.

In step S4903, processing for adding the variable display time included in the hold command to the storage counter is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the acquired pending information is the pending number correspondence information, the variable display time corresponding to the pending number at the present time is added to the storage counter. After executing the process of step S4903, the pending information grasping process ends.

Returning to the description of the hold control process, after executing the process of step S4803, the process for hold notice is executed in step S4804. This process is the same as the process of FIG. 50, and performs a process for determining the design for holding notice based on the information of the storage counter and the operation status (counter) of each of the distribution members 300 and 310. . Then, in step S4805, the hold increase processing is executed, and then the hold control processing ends. The processing of step S4805 is the same as the processing of step S2605.

If no hold command has been received in step S4801, it is determined in step S4806 whether or not a shift command has been received. If so, in step S4807, the secondary side reserved storage number SN is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S4808, a symbol announcement process is executed. After that, shift processing is executed in step S4809, and the hold control processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, no correspondence shift processing is executed. This is a change based on the fact that in the present embodiment, the same processing is performed for each piece of reservation information for the number-of-holds corresponding information and the number-of-holds non-corresponding information. This modification simplifies the processing configuration.

The symbol announcement process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, as already explained, the symbol notice is configured to be performed based on the total time (storage counter) of the variable display time. As a case of change, the case where the hold information on the priority side is acquired has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the total time of the variable display time can change not only when the priority-side hold information is acquired but also when the non-priority-side hold information is acquired.

In the symbol notice process in this embodiment, first, in step S5001, a process of subtracting a numerical value corresponding to the variable display time of the pending information shifted to the execution area by the current shift command from the storage counter is performed. In the subsequent step S5002, a pending notice process is executed in order to grasp the V winning rate based on the current storage counter. The processing of steps S5001 to S5003 is the same as the processing of steps S3301, S3302 and S3304.

In step S5004, it is determined whether or not the symbol of the symbol notice grasped in step S5003 is demoted from the symbol of the previous symbol notice. If it is not demoted, it is determined whether or not it is promoted in step S5005, and if it is promoted, the process for notification of promotion is executed in step S5006, and then the process for symbol notice is terminated. do. In the promotion notification process, the symbols in the symbol notice are changed, and processing for notifying that the symbols have been promoted due to the change is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), it is assumed that the design notice is performed in the special reservation image P2 of the non-specific design displayed in the second unit reservation display area Ga2 in the first reservation display area Ga . When the process for promotion notification is performed, after the hold information which is the object of the symbol notice is acquired, the hold information is newly acquired and the total time of the variable display time is changed. In FIG. 74(b), the special reservation image P2 displayed in the second unit reservation display area Ga2 is shifted to the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the reservation information on the side of the first result display unit AS It shows an example in which the hold information on the second result display part BS side is acquired. In the promotion notification process, the display control device 212 is controlled to change the type of the special hold image P2 from the non-specific pattern to the specific pattern (the first specific pattern in the figure) and display, and the pattern promotion occurs. The display control device 212 is controlled so as to display, for example, "chance up!!"

On the other hand, if the symbol has been demoted in step S5004, the process for notification of demotion is executed in step S5007, and then the process for symbol notice is terminated. In the demotion informing process, the symbols in the symbol advance notice are changed, and processing for informing that the symbols have been demoted due to the change is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 75(a), a specific pattern displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 in the first reserved display area Ga (the first specific pattern in the figure) is displayed in the special reserved image P2. Suppose a warning has been given. When the process for demotion notification is performed, after the reservation information that is the target of the symbol advance notice is acquired, the reservation information is newly acquired and the total time of the variable display time is changed. In FIG. 75(b), the special reservation image P2 displayed in the second unit reservation display area Ga2 is shifted to the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the reservation information on the side of the first result display unit AS It shows an example in which the hold information on the second result display part BS side is acquired. In the demotion notification process, the display control device 212 is controlled to change the type of the special hold image P2 from the specific pattern to the non-specific pattern, and the fact that the pattern promotion has occurred is indicated by, for example, "Pinch!! ” is displayed and the display control device 212 is controlled. In addition, in the demotion notification process, a message is displayed that suggests that a further change (promotion) of the design may occur by acquiring new reservation information, such as "Chance UP with acquisition of reservation?!" It controls the controller 212 .

How the execution timing of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment is changed will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the length of each period is shown to be different from the actual length in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the V mode and the opening/closing execution mode overlap.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(a), the opening/closing execution mode is performed at the timing from tO1 to tO2, and the first distributing member 300 or the second distributing member 300 or the second distributing member 300 is performed at the timing from tV1 to tV2, which is the earlier timing. A situation in which the member 310 is in the V mode will be described. In this case, if the time until the start of the opening/closing execution mode, that is, the total time of the variable display time is not changed, the opening/closing execution mode and the V mode do not overlap, so that the V winning does not occur. Therefore, in the symbol announcement, the special holding image P2 using the non-specific symbols is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), at timings tF1 and tF2, which are timings prior to the start of the opening/closing execution mode (more specifically, timings prior to the start of the game round that triggers the start of the opening/closing execution mode). , the winning to the upper operation port 33 occurs and the common pending number CRN increases, the variable display time is shortened compared to before the increase, as shown in the variable display time table of FIG. As a result, the time until the opening/closing execution mode is shortened, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed earlier than in the case of FIG. 76(a). Then, in FIG. 76(b), the opening/closing execution mode at the timing of tO3 to tO4 overlaps with the V mode at the timing of tV1 to tV2, and a V prize can occur. As a result, the special holding image P2 in the design notice is changed from the non-specific design to the specific design.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), the opening/closing execution mode is performed at the timing from tO1 to tO2, and the first distributing member 300 or the second distributing member 310 is performed at the timing from tV1 to tV2, which is the later timing. is in the V mode. In this case as well, similar to FIG. 76(a), since the opening/closing execution mode and the V mode do not overlap, the special holding image P2 of the non-specific symbol is displayed in the symbol notice.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), at timings tF1 and tF2, which are timings before the start of the opening/closing execution mode (more specifically, timings before the start of the game cycle that triggers the start of the opening/closing execution mode). , When a prize is won in the lower operation port 34, the reserved information is the reserved information on the priority side, so the game round of the reserved information obtained later can be executed before the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the time until the opening/closing execution mode is extended, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed at a later timing than in the case of FIG. 77(a). Then, in FIG. 77(b), the opening/closing execution mode at the timing from tO3 to tO4 overlaps with the V mode at the timing from tV1 to tV2, and a V winning can occur. As a result, the special holding image P2 in the design notice is changed from the non-specific design to the specific design.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the configuration in which the time until the opening/closing execution mode can be changed, whether or not the opening/closing execution mode overlaps with the V mode can be changed by the player's operation. As a result, the time until the start of the opening/closing execution mode can be used more meaningfully, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased by encouraging participation in the game.

When the upper operation opening 33 is won, the time to the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be shortened, and when the lower operation opening 34 is to be won, the time to the opening/closing execution mode is likely to be extended. That is, when there is a gap between the opening/closing execution mode and the V mode, the opening/closing execution mode can be adjusted forward or backward. By doing so, it is possible to motivate the players to participate.

In addition, in order to allow winning to the lower operation port 34 even in the normal state (during the low-frequency support mode), it is possible to win the lower operation port 34 even when the electric accessory 34a is closed. It is also possible to increase the frequency of the electric accessory 34a being in the open state in the mode, lengthen the period in which the open state continues, increase the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and the like. Further, an operation opening may be provided separately in addition to the lower operation opening 34, and the holding information on the second result display section BS side may be acquired based on the winning of the operation opening. In these cases, in order to suppress a rise in the pitching rate due to acquisition of the pending information of the second result display section BS during normal times, for example, the distribution table for the second result display section is changed to that for the first result display section. The above configuration of the table that is more advantageous than the sorting table may be changed (the table for the first result display section is more advantageous, or the same advantage is given).

As described above, the ball-entering portions to be won in order to adjust the time until the open/close execution mode are the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34 that trigger the lottery. Therefore, in order to adjust the time until the open/close execution mode, the player is not forced to use a useless shooting mode, and even if the change does not go well despite winning the prize, at least the winning lottery can be received. No loss. Therefore, it is possible to lower the hurdles for participation in a game that adjusts the time, and favorably encourage participation in the game.

In the promotion notification process, control is performed to notify that the symbol has been promoted, while in the demotion notification process, control is performed to notify that the symbol has been demoted, and further pending acquisition (change of time ) was configured to control so as to perform notification prompting. By doing so, even when the demotion notification is made, the player can be made to recognize that further changes are possible, and the player shoots the game ball so that the pattern is changed again. It is considered to continue. Also, in other words, in the promotion notification process, the configuration is such that control is performed so as not to perform notification that prompts further holding acquisition. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the symbol is demoted due to another change even though the symbol has been promoted.

Since the time to the opening/closing execution mode differs depending on the number of common reservations CRN, whether overlap between the opening/closing execution mode and the V mode occurs depends on the number of common reservations CRN. Therefore, according to the number of common pending numbers CRN, it can be said that the probability that the winning lottery mode after the open/close execution mode becomes the high probability mode due to the occurrence of the V prize is different. By doing so, unlike the game of simply shifting to the opening/closing execution mode to obtain a prize ball, or the game of shifting to the high probability mode by making V winning during the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to shift to the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to make a novel game such as changing the transition rate to the high probability mode by using the interval.

In this case, even if the time until the opening/closing execution mode is once set, the time until the opening/closing execution mode may change due to further acquisition of reservation information (change in the common reservation number CRN). By doing so, it is possible to leave room for the player to intervene and encourage participation in the game.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the fifth embodiment is modified so that when the upper limit number of winnings is generated in the round game in the open/close execution mode, the phenomenon that the V winning rate is improved can occur. A configuration for that purpose will be described below.

First, in this embodiment, the distribution table for the second result display section (FIG. 55) shown in the fifth embodiment is also used as the distribution table for the first result display section. That is, even when a jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the upper operating port 33, there is a case where the 16R jackpot result B in which the maximum number of prizes can be won can occur.

In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment, the waiting time between rounds of the 16R jackpot result B in which the maximum number of prizes can be won is set longer than in the fifth embodiment. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 78, in the opening/closing process of this embodiment, the processes of steps S5101 to S5118 are executed in the same manner as steps S3401 to S3418, and the round counter RC is 0 in step S5119. or not. If the round counter RC is not 0, it is determined in step S5120 whether or not the current open/close execution mode is based on the 16R jackpot result B. If it is not the 16R jackpot result B, that is, if it is the 16R jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step S5121 and "375 (1.5 sec)" is input to the timer counter TC. In this case, as already explained, the waiting time between rounds is shorter than the period of V mode, and even if the waiting time between rounds overlaps with the V mode, the round before or after the waiting time There is an overlap between the open time at and the V mode.

In the case of the 16R jackpot result B, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is 1 to 3 in step S5122. If the round counter RC is not 1 to 3, that is, if the round to end this time is the 1st round to the 13th round, "750 (3.0 sec)" is input to the timer counter TC in step S5123. . In this case, the waiting time between rounds is longer than the period of the V mode, and if the V mode overlaps with the waiting time between rounds, the V prize cannot occur in the V mode.

If the round counter RC is 1 to 3 at step S5122, "25 (0.1 sec)" is input to the timer counter TC at step S5124. After executing the processing of step S5121, step S5123, or step S5124, a closing command is set in step S5125, and the main opening/closing processing ends. The processing of step S5125 is the same as the processing of step S3421. If the round counter RC is 0 at step S5119, the opening/closing process is terminated after executing the ending process at steps S5126 and S5127. The processing of steps S5126 and S5127 is the same as the processing of steps S3422 and S3423.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the standby time between rounds and the V aspect overlap, there is a case where the V prize cannot occur in the V aspect. On the other hand, as shown in the fifth embodiment, when the maximum number of prizes to be won in the round game is generated, the execution timing of the round game after the next time is changed. Therefore, in addition to the phenomenon that overlapping with the V mode described in the fifth embodiment does not occur due to the occurrence of the maximum winning number of prizes, Even if there is no overlap with the V mode, the overlap may occur due to the occurrence of the maximum number of winnings.

These cases will be described in detail with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 79 and 80, the length of each period is displayed differently from the actual length in order to make it easier to understand whether the V mode overlaps with the round game or the waiting time between rounds.

FIG. 79(a) shows a case where the standby time between rounds and the V mode overlap. That is, from the timing of tO1 to the timing of tO2, the waiting time between the round game in which the accessory device 150 is opened and the round game in which the accessory device 150 is opened at the timing of tO3 (from the timing of tO2 to the timing of tO3). timing), the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are in the V state from the timing tV1 to the timing tV2. In this case, in the round game started at the timing t01, unless the upper limit number of prizes is won, the execution timing of the round game is not changed, and the V win cannot occur. As a result, the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in the round game from tO1 to tO2, if the maximum winning number is generated at timing tO4, the round game ends at timing tO4. Then, the next round game is started at timing tO5 after the waiting time between rounds has passed, and the round game ends at timing tO6. As a result, the V mode occurring at the timing of tV1 to tV2 overlaps with the round game performed at the timing of tO5 to tO6, and a V win can occur during the round game. As a result, when a V win occurs, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the low probability mode.

FIG. 80(a) shows a case where the round game and the V mode overlap. That is, in the round game starting from the timing tO3, which is the round game next to the round game from the timing tO1 to the timing tO2, overlap with the V mode occurring at the timing tV1 to tV2 occurs. there is In this case, if the maximum winning number is not generated in the round game from tO1 to tO2, V winning can occur in the next round game from tO3. In , it is considered that the game is played so that the maximum number of winnings is not generated (more specifically, the game is played until the maximum number of winnings is reached).

However, as shown in FIG. 80(b), in the round game from tO1 to tO2, if the upper limit number of prizes is won at timing tO4, the round game ends at timing tO4. Then, the next round game is started at timing tO5 after the waiting time between rounds has passed, and the round game ends at timing tO6. As a result, the round game from tO5 to tO6 and the V mode from tV1 to tV2 do not overlap. More specifically, the V mode from tV1 to tV2 overlaps the waiting time between the round game that ends at the timing of tO6 and the next round game (if the round game that ends at the timing of tO6 is the 13th round, the winning will not occur), or overlap with the ending time.

As shown in FIG. 80(b) above, in the case where the maximum number of prizes to be won has occurred and overlap with the V mode has ceased to occur, and the V mode overlaps with the waiting time of the next round game, If the next round game is before the 13th round in which a prize can actually be won, if the upper limit number of prizes is further generated, it is possible to overlap with the V mode again. . That is, as shown in FIG. 80(c), in the round game from tO5 to tO6, if the maximum winning number is generated at timing tO7, the round game ends at timing tO7. Then, the next round game is started at the timing of t08 after the waiting time between rounds, and the next round game and the V mode are overlapped.

As described above, when the maximum winning number is generated in the round game during the opening and closing execution mode, the round game after the next time may overlap with the V mode and overlap with the V mode. It may disappear. As a result, when the round game is ended by winning the upper limit winning number, there are cases where it is advantageous to the player and cases where it is disadvantageous for the player, thereby diversifying the game. Participation in the game can be encouraged by allowing the player to select which event to generate. As a result, it is possible to create novel games that are different from conventional gaming machines, such as simply obtaining prize balls based on winnings in each round game.

Even if overlap with the V mode does not occur, if there is a round game that can actually win a prize after the V mode, it is possible to win the maximum winning number in the round game before the round game. If it is generated and the round game is ended, overlap with the V mode can occur. In this way, it is possible to select whether or not to generate the maximum winning number in each round game, taking into account the balance with the prize balls obtained based on the generated winning of the maximum winning number. It is possible to allow the player to do so.

Regarding the pattern correction processing (FIG. 57, step S3509) in the opening/closing execution mode processing (FIG. 57) shown in the fifth embodiment, in the present embodiment, overlap of the V mode occurs as described above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a process for performing a notification that the V-mode overlap has not occurred, a notification that the V-mode has not changed, or the like is performed. That is, in the symbol correction process (FIG. 58), according to the V winning points VP calculated based on the process for the first distribution member and the process for the second distribution member, the first specific pattern, the second specific pattern, Instead of or in addition to the process of setting non-specific symbols (step S3604, step S3609, step S3613), it is preferable to execute a process for notifying the presence or absence of overlap with the V mode in the subsequent round game. It is preferable to use the promotion notification and demotion notification shown in the ninth embodiment as notification when overlap with the V mode occurs and notification when no overlap occurs. That is, when overlap with the V mode occurs, "chance up!!" should be announced as promotion notification, and when overlap with V mode no longer occurs, demotion notification "Pinch! ” should be reported. In the case of the demotion notification, for example, it is preferable to issue a notification such as "If you win 10 or more in the next and subsequent rounds, chances increase?!"

Combining this embodiment with the ninth embodiment provides a gaming machine capable of changing the V winning rate before and during the opening/closing execution mode. In this way, even if the V winning rate cannot be changed in one period, it is possible to maintain the expectation that it can be changed in the other period. In this case, in order to change the V winning rate before the opening and closing execution mode, it is necessary to win the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34, and to change the V winning rate during the opening and closing execution mode, the large winning opening 32a It is necessary to win a prize (to win the maximum winning number of game balls). In this way, by making the game ball enter the upper working hole 33, the lower working hole 34, and the big winning hole 32a, the V winning rate changes, so that the V winning rate changes according to the lottery inside the game machine. By comparison, the player can feel the change, and the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by the change caused by his/her own operation. In this way, active participation in the game can be encouraged.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, as in the first to fourth embodiments, the period of the round game during the opening and closing execution mode is difficult to change. Let

In the present embodiment, the main controller 81 executes a process corresponding to the big hit symbol determination process (FIG. 35). That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81(a), in the variation start process in the game round control process of the present embodiment, the process of steps S5201 to S5209 is performed similarly to the process of steps S701 to S709. After the lottery, allocation determination, and stop result setting processing for the main display section 43 are executed, V possibility determination processing is executed in step S5210. The V possibility determination process is a process corresponding to the above-mentioned symbol determination process for the big win, and grasps the operation status of each distribution member 300, 310 at the start of the game cycle, and executes opening and closing based on the grasp result and the operation cycle. This is the process for determining the possibility of winning the V prize in the mode.

In the V possibility determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, first, the process for the first distribution member is executed in step S5301, and the process for the second distribution member is executed in step S5302. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S1801 and S1802 in the symbol determination process for the big hit. A counter area for calculating each time and an area for V winning points VP may be provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and the above processing may be performed using these areas.

In step S5303, it is determined whether or not the V winning point VP is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S5304, a process of storing the V possible flag in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. The V possible flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the V winning is possible during the open/close execution mode in the situation at the start of the game cycle. On the other hand, when the V winning point VP is less than 1 in step S5303, if the V possibility flag is stored, it is deleted, and if it is not stored, the process of maintaining that state is executed. After executing the processing of step S5304 or step S5305, this V possibility determination processing ends.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process, if the jackpot is not determined in step S5204, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S5211. Such processing is similar to step S710. After the processing of step S5210 or step S5211 is executed, each processing for starting the game cycle is executed in steps S5212 to S5214 in the same way as in steps S711 to S713. However, the variation command set in step S5213 includes information on the possibility of the V prize determined in step S5210. Specifically, it contains information as to whether or not a V prize can be won in the open/close execution mode triggered by the game round to be started this time. The performance control device 82 decides the pattern for the big win based on this information, and if the V prize is possible, the first specific pattern or the second specific pattern is decided as the pattern for the big prize this time, and the V prize is possible. Otherwise, the non-specific pattern is determined as the pattern for this big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, as the processing on the side of the effect control device 82, the processing of grasping the operation status of the distribution member at the start of the game cycle is not performed. Thereby, the processing load on the production control device 82 side can be suppressed.

The processing for transition to the high-probability mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(b).

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S5401 whether or not V winning has occurred, and if V winning has occurred, in step S5402 it is determined whether or not a V possible flag is stored. If the V-possible flag is stored, the processing for storing the high-probability mode transition flag is executed in step S5403, and then this transition processing is terminated. Further, if V winning has not occurred, or if V possible flag has not been stored even if V winning has occurred, this transition processing is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of a game round, it is determined whether or not V winning can occur during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the game round, and it is determined that V winning can occur. Then, when a V winning actually occurs, the high probability mode is set after the open/close execution mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V prize does not occur at the start of the game cycle, the low probability mode is set instead of the high probability mode even if the V prize actually occurs. Further, even if it is determined that V winning can occur at the start of the game round, the high probability mode is not set unless V winning actually occurs.

In other words, instead of setting the high-probability mode based only on the presence or absence of a V winning during the opening/closing execution mode, the possibility of the V winning predicted prior to the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the game cycle that triggers the opening/closing execution mode). It can be said that this is a configuration in which the high-probability mode is set when matching is achieved. By doing so, for example, when it is determined that a V prize has occurred even though no prize has been awarded to the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode due to an erroneous detection or the like. It is possible to avoid setting the high-probability mode based on erroneous detection. In addition, for example, even though the game machine side assumed that V winning would not occur, if V winning occurred by manipulating the behavior of the game ball in the opening and closing execution mode for illegal purposes, etc., there is a high probability. It is possible to avoid being set as a mode.

In this case, as already explained, it is assumed that the actual opening/closing time is unlikely to change during the opening/closing execution mode. For example, in the above embodiment, the period in which about 8 game balls can win in each round is set as the upper limit open period, but the configuration is such that the upper limit number of wins, 10, cannot occur by shortening the period. may be Also, each round may be terminated based on the elapse of the upper limit opening period without setting the upper limit number of winning prizes.

In the above-described embodiment, the winning lottery process for the big win is performed at the start of the game round, and the lottery of the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is performed by the first distribution member 300 or the second shaking at the time of execution of the winning lottery process. It can be said that this configuration is performed based on the operating conditions of the dividing member 310 and the like. By doing so, not only is the operation status of the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member 310, etc. at the start of the game cycle used for determining the symbols for production, but also the actual player's profit will affect the part involved in Therefore, a great deal of attention is paid to the start timing of the game cycle. A novel game can be realized in which a winning lottery based on the numerical information and a winning lottery mode lottery based on the operation status of the distribution member at the time of the winning lottery are performed at the start of the game cycle.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing of operation to the V distribution side after that based on the operation cycle and the current situation of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 in the accessory device 150 However, for example, it may be configured to predict the future situation based on the current situation and information such as how many seconds before the current situation the movement was to the V distribution side. In this way, for example, while it is determined to operate to the V allocation side for a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, the timing to operate to the V allocation side is determined by lottery or the like. , even if the operation cycle is not completely fixed (uniform on average), it is possible to grasp the possibility of operation to the V distribution side during the subsequent opening and closing execution mode to some extent. .

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the opening time of each round is set to a short opening time such that the maximum winning number of game balls in each round does not occur, and the opening time of each round is restricted from changing. However, the configuration for limiting the change in the opening time of each round is not limited to the above. For example, there is no configuration that ends the round with the maximum winning number of winning balls, and the configuration that updates the round when the predetermined opening time has passed, that is, the opening time condition is the only condition for ending the round. It is good also as a structure provided with. In addition, a storage device capable of storing game balls is provided on the upstream side of the accessory device 150 so that the maximum winning number of balls is generated at a predetermined timing, and the storage device is operated at the predetermined timing. By changing to the non-storage state, it is possible to adjust the timing at which the upper limit winning number of balls enter the accessory device 150 occurs, and it is possible to limit the change in the opening time.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member 310, etc., which operate periodically, are used to generate the upper limit winning number of winning balls in the round game during the open/close execution mode. Then, the probability of V winning in the next round game is different from that in the case where the upper limit number of winning balls does not occur. As long as the probability of occurrence of is different, for example, the configuration may be such that the distribution mode of each of the distribution members 300, 310, etc. is changed. Further, even if the probability of setting the high probability mode is different depending on whether or not the number of winning balls of the upper limit has occurred, the privilege to be given depends on whether or not the number of winning balls of the upper limit has occurred. A different configuration is acceptable.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the periodic operation of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310, the V distribution (open state or closed state) distributed to the V winning side can be changed to a short time mode or a long time mode. Although it is configured to be performed by the mode and the mode, it may be only the mode for a long time. Alternatively, an intermediate time mode between the short time mode and the long time mode may be set.

(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect for the game round is performed based on the ball entering the upper actuation opening 33 or the lower actuation opening 34, and the type of symbol to be stopped and displayed in the game round is the first distribution. Although it is configured to be determined based on the operation status of the member 300 and the second distribution member 310, the content of the effect itself for the game round is determined based on the ball entering the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. It is good also as a structure which determines based on the operation condition of the distribution member 300 or the 2nd distribution member 310. FIG. For example, in a situation in which a V prize is likely to occur, an effect that suggests a chance for the player is performed, and in a situation in which a V win is unlikely to occur, an effect that suggests that the player does not have a chance is performed. You may allow

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed by the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201. However, the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that does not include at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310 or a configuration that does not include the rotating body 201 may be used. In short, in a structure in which game balls that have won a prize in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the V winning opening 182a or the exit opening 182b, it is sufficient that the distribution is distributed by a distribution section that performs a predetermined operation. .

(7) Although the start timing of the periodic operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 is set to be when the power is turned on, the periodic operation may be started from a predetermined timing. For example, the periodical operation may be started when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(8) The operation cycle of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 may be changed according to the game state. For example, in the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, the operation cycle may be such that the frequency of the V mode increases. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of the V prize occurring in the opening/closing execution mode that shifts to the high-frequency support mode or the high-probability mode. In these cases, for example, when the opening/closing execution mode ends (when transitioning to the high-frequency support mode or the high-probability mode), the operation cycle may be switched.

(9) The entrance sensor 179 may be provided corresponding to each of the left and right opening/closing accessories 168 . That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the same entrance sensor 179 is used to detect a prize from any of the opening and closing accessories 168 to the accessory device 150. A separate entrance sensor may be configured to detect the winning of a game ball. In this way, when a prize is won in the accessory device 150, it can be detected more quickly. For example, when a prize is won from the winning path on the side where V winning is easier, notification to that effect can be performed.

(10) The game balls sorted (V sorted) by the second sorting member 310 always win V prizes. Even in this case, the probability of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is different from the probability of V distribution by the first distribution member 300, and the deviation distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. If the game ball has either a configuration in which the game balls are distributed by the first distribution member 300, or a configuration in which the operation cycles of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are different, two vibrations The coexistence of the separate members becomes significant.

(11) The main control unit 81 has detecting means (sensors) for detecting fraudulent activity and means for executing corresponding processes based on the detection results (for example, addition). In particular, the opening/closing execution mode is started by the V winning to the role product 150, and the high probability mode is set by the V winning, so an act of illegally generating the V winning to the role product 150 is assumed. For example, this action can be caused by magnetism, radio waves, or vibrations, and a detection sensor is provided to detect these (magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc.), and based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the progress of the game is stopped. , notification, and further notification to the game hall (external output).

(12) The order of digestion of the pending information based on the prize winning to the upper working port 33 and the pending information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 (the order to be judged) is transferred to the lower working port 34. However, the order of acquisition of the pending information may be set. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the validity determination of the pending information based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 is more advantageous than the valid determination of the pending information based on the winning to the upper operating port 33, as a player There is also a feeling that I would like the judgment of the pending information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 to be executed first as in the above embodiment, and I want to postpone it later and to the winning to the upper working port 33 first. There is also a feeling that I want you to execute the propriety judgment of the pending information based on. By entrusting such a wavering feeling of the player to a random order not intended by the player, such as the winning order of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, the game can be made more diverse. It becomes possible.

(13) The game ball that has been V-distributed by the second distribution member 310 is led out to the warp passage 250 as a region where the visibility from the front of the game machine is lower than that. A V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front does not change, or a V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved. In this way, not only the visibility of the game ball is reduced, but also the fact that the V distribution has been performed can be easily confirmed by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in a configuration such as the pachinko machine 10 where the greatest attention is paid to whether or not a V prize is generated, it is easier to increase the degree of attention by making the fact that the V allocation is performed more conspicuous. It is considered to be Therefore, if the visibility from the front of the game machine does not decrease (does not change/improves) at the time of V distribution as in the above configuration, the subsequent motion of the game ball can be fully recognized. It is preferable to raise the degree of attention.

However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the act of aiming to intentionally generate V distribution, the visibility of the game ball after V distribution is performed and the location where V distribution is performed ( It is preferable not to excessively enhance the visibility of the area where the second distribution member 310 is provided.

In this respect, in each of the above-described embodiments, V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310, which has relatively low visibility from the front of the game machine, and V distribution is performed by the first distribution member 300, which has relatively high visibility from the front of the game machine. Since it is configured to change the V winning rate by combining the operation patterns of both distribution members 300 and 310, the first distribution member 300 eliminates the inconvenience caused by the deterioration of the visibility from the front of the game machine. In addition, the inconvenience caused by the improved visibility from the front of the game machine is covered by the second distribution member 310. It's becoming

(14) A game ball that has won a prize in the role product device 150 is discharged to the outside of the role product device 150 through the V prize passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the discharged game ball passes through a discharge passage (not shown) to the pachinko machine. 10, but may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150. FIG.

(15) The position of the accessory device 150 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be provided in the left region PE2, or may be provided in the upper region PE1 or the lower region PE4. In order not to change the ball-entering rate to the accessory device 150 during the opening/closing execution mode, if the electric accessory 34a whose ball-entering rate changes is arranged downstream of the accessory device 150, good.

(16) In the accessory device 150, in place of the configuration in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened so that the ball can be entered, a game ball flowing down like the first variable winning device 341 or the second variable winning device 342 If a configuration (a configuration with a large opening) is adopted, the number of entered balls during the opening/closing execution mode can be more managed on the gaming machine side.

(17) The operation cycles of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are not limited to those described above. For example, the operation cycle of the first distribution member 300 may be configured to be in the closed state for 2 seconds every 20 seconds. In this case, even in the 4-round open/close execution mode, the V mode is set at least once, and the rate of transition to the high probability mode can be increased. Further, the operating cycle of the second distribution member 310 may be set to a shorter operating cycle than the operating cycle of the first distributing member 300 (the operating cycle in which the V mode is likely to occur).

(18) The first distribution member 300, the second distribution member 310, and the rotor 201 are provided as distribution means in the accessory device 150, and the V winning rate is changed by the operation of these members. These sorting means may be provided on the upstream side of the accessory device 150 . Then, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 may differ depending on the sorting mode of the sorting means, and the V winning rate may vary depending on the change in the winning rate.

(19) The transition rate to the high-probability mode is changed by the operation of the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member 310, and the rotor 201 as distribution means. A counter may be acquired each time a prize is won, and a lottery based on the acquired counter may change the rate of transition to the high-probability mode. In this case, for example, the winning probability of the lottery may be changed periodically, or the winning probability in subsequent rounds may change when the upper limit winning number of game balls is entered.

(20) Both the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342 have a shutter 358 as a sorting means. A configuration may be adopted in which the discharge passage with the device 342 is shared, a shutter 358 is provided in the shared portion, and the shared shutter 358 divides the area into the V winning area 356 and the discharge area 357 .

(21) The positions where the first variable winning device 341 and the second variable winning device 342 are provided are not limited to those described above. For example, the first variable winning device 341 may be provided in the right side area PE4 and the second variable winning device 342 may be provided in the left side area PE3, or may be arranged in the upper side area PE1 and the lower side area PE4. In order to make the two variable winning devices 341 and 342 aim and hit, it is preferable to arrange them in a positional relationship that enables at least separate hitting.

(22) The standby time of each round is set to be shorter than the period during which the distribution members 300 and 310 are maintained in the V mode. It is preferable that the period from switching to the closed state to the next open state be shorter than the period during which the V mode is maintained.

(23) The actual opening/closing time of each opening/closing execution mode is used to calculate whether or not there is an overlap with the V mode. good. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in the processing load, the above embodiment is preferable.

(24) The effect during the round may be set by using a configuration in which the open time of each round is difficult to change (hard to enter the upper limit number of balls). That is, in the production control device 82, the data for the round production to be executed over the opening time of each round is stored, and the round production is executed in each round. Since the length of each round is difficult to change, there is no need to store a huge amount of production data in anticipation of changes in the length of rounds, as was the case in the past, thus reducing storage capacity. can be planned. In this case, the effect may be performed over a plurality of rounds, or the effect may be performed including the waiting time between rounds, and these times may be set as the time for effect.

(25) When the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode overlaps with the V mode, the current jackpot result is reported as the game result of the game cycle by stopping and displaying the specific symbols. It is only necessary for the player to be able to grasp the occurrence of the duplication, and the fact may be notified separately from the notification of the result of the big win. Specifically, for example, a predetermined character may appear, or the possibility of overlap of the V mode may be expressed by numbers, a meter, or the like.

(26) Utilizing the relationship between the role product device 150 that performs random actions and the first distribution member 300, the second distribution member 310, etc. that are provided in the role product device 150 and perform periodic actions Although the configuration is such that the symbols for the big win are determined by the combination, the configuration may be such that these operations are performed independently of each other. For example, the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 may be provided outside the role device 150 and may be operation means for changing the behavior of game balls that do not enter the role device 150 .

(27) The timing of the action to open the accessory device 150 is based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, but the timing of the action to open the accessory device 150 is random as the game progresses. It is not limited to the above as long as it can occur in For example, as the game progresses, it may be randomly opened by a numerical lottery or the like on the gaming machine side.

(28) Although the design for the big win is determined based on the actual opening/closing time in the opening/closing execution mode by the accessory device 150 and the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310, it may be configured to determine the type of effect. . For example, a predetermined character may appear or the background of the variable display of the pattern may be changed according to the timing at which the actual opening/closing time and the V mode are likely to overlap.

(29) Although the distribution members 300 and 310 that perform periodic motions are arranged on the downstream side of the accessory device 150 that performs random motions, these relationships may be reversed.

(30) When the accessory device 150 is closed, the game ball cannot enter the accessory device 150 and cannot be distributed by the first distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 310 ( However, if the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, the opening and closing accessory 168 will be half-opened even if the accessory device 150 is in the closed state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a part of the ball can be entered into the accessory device 150. FIG.

(31) As a configuration to prevent the period during which the open state continues in the round game from changing, the upper limit opening period is set to the period during which the maximum winning number of game balls does not win. is not terminated, and the round game may be terminated when the upper limit opening period elapses.

(32) In a predetermined round game, if the upper limit number of prizes is not won, V prizes will occur in subsequent round games, and if the upper limit number of prizes are won, V prizes will not occur. It is only necessary that the degree of advantage afterward for the player differs between when the maximum number of winnings is generated and when the maximum number of winnings is not generated. Alternatively, the high-probability mode may not be set when the upper limit number of prizes are won, and the high-probability mode may be set when the upper limit number of prizes are not won. Also, the high probability mode may be set by lottery based on numerical information, and the probability of setting the high probability mode may be different depending on whether or not the upper limit number of prizes has been won. Further, the difference in the advantage is not limited to the level of the lottery mode, and may be the level of the support mode, or the continuation rate of the open/close execution mode.

(33) By acquiring the hold information before the opening/closing execution mode, the design notified in the symbol notice can be changed, that is, the setting probability of the high probability mode can be changed, but it is acquired during the opening/closing execution mode. The setting probability of the high-probability mode may be different depending on the number of pending information items.

(34) When performing a lottery for holding information, V possibility determination processing based on the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is performed to determine in advance whether the high probability mode can be set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined in advance that the high-probability mode can be set based on the action status of the accessory or the like. In this way, it is possible to closely associate the action status of the performance accessory with the occurrence of the V prize.

(35) Although the opening and closing accessory 168, the first distribution member 300, and the second distribution member 310 have been described as examples of the accessories that change the behavior of the game ball in the game area PE, they are limited to these accessories. A movable stage that changes the flow speed of game balls, an opening/closing door that permits/limits passage to passages such as warp passages, and a sorting device that changes the destination of game balls. good too.

(36) In a configuration in which the variable display control processing on the effect control device 82 side is executed based on the variable command and the type command from the main control device 81 side, the variable display control processing includes the first distribution member 300 and the Although it is configured to determine the stop pattern of the game round in consideration of the operation status of the second distribution member 310, at least information on the variation pattern of the game round from the main control device 81 side (variation command and type command) and It is sufficient if the variation pattern of the game round on the effect control device 82 side is determined based on the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 as operation means, and the contents during the variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 It may be a determined configuration. Further, it may be configured such that the content of the presentation of a predetermined character or the like appearing during the game is determined. In short, the action of the action means as the content of the game round effect is not determined based on the game result, but the action content of the game round effect is determined based on the game result and the operation status of the action means. Any configuration is acceptable.
(37) It is also possible to make it possible for the performance control device 82 on the sub side to be able to grasp the operation status of the role object such as the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 without going through the main control device 81 . Specifically, for example, detection sensors for detecting position information of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are provided, and the detection sensors are connected to the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 . In this way, the MPU 242 can grasp the operation status of the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 without going through the main controller 81 . As a result, no new command from the main control unit 81 is required when determining the pattern and the contents of the effect by the performance control device 82 in consideration of the operation status of the character, and changes from the existing configuration can be made. can be less.
(38) In the configuration related to the read-ahead notification that notifies the likelihood of occurrence of V winning before the start of the game cycle, 7 symbols (first specific symbols) are stopped as the special holding image P2 and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. An image suggesting that 5 patterns (second specific pattern) stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, or an image suggesting that 4 patterns (non-specific patterns) stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode However, these effects are merely examples, and are not limited to the above as long as they suggest the likelihood of a V winning. Also, for example, in an image suggesting that 7 symbols or 5 symbols stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, instead of directly displaying 7 or 5, 7? may be added to indicate that there is a possibility that the 7 symbols or 5 symbols will stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode. In this way, even if the likelihood of V winning during the opening/closing execution mode changes due to subsequent acquisition of hold information or the like, it is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the performance is downgraded.
In addition, in the configuration related to the above-mentioned look-ahead notification, as a configuration for displaying only an image suggesting that the non-specific symbols will stop and shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the symbols will not be demoted (promoted) due to subsequent acquisition of pending information, etc. may be configured.

(39) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reels are stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the gaming machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The following feature group is "A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with various members that change the behavior of game balls flowing down the game area. An example is a variable ball entry device that can be opened and closed ( For example, see Patent Literature 1).", the problem to be solved by the present invention is that ``here, in game machines, there is a demand for a device that raises the level of attention to the game.'' .

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A first operating means capable of executing a predetermined first action that can change the behavior of the game ball when a specific event (winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34) occurs as the game progresses. (Opening and closing accessory 168) and
second action means (first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) capable of executing a predetermined second action that can change the behavior of the game ball at a predetermined cycle;
Grasping means for grasping the situation of the second action when the first action is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event (first distribution member processing and second distribution member processing in the production control device 82 functions to perform) and
Using the grasp result of the grasping means, effect determination means for determining the content of the effect by the effect means (symbol display device 41) (function to execute the symbol determination process for the big hit in the effect control device 82),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the situation of the second action when the first action is performed is grasped based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the content of the effect by the effect means is determined using the result of the grasp. These first and second actions are actions that can change the behavior of the game ball, but the first action is executed based on the occurrence of a specific event that triggered the grasp. The second action is an action that is executed at a predetermined cycle regardless of the occurrence of a specific event, and has different triggers for execution. In this way, by linking not only actions related to the occurrence of specific events, but also actions unrelated to the occurrence of specific events, with the performance, it is possible to more closely associate the behavior of the game ball with the content of the performance. , and enjoying the flowing down of game balls, the original game of the game machine can be livened up by the content of the presentation. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Regarding the ``grasping means'', for example, ``grasping means for grasping the execution timing of the first action and the operation status of the second action based on the occurrence of the specific event'', based on the execution timing of the first action and the status of the second action derived from the predetermined period" or "acquiring means for grasping the situation of the second action derived from the predetermined period" or "acquiring the first action and the second action based on the occurrence of the specific event Even if it is expressed as "grasping means for grasping" or the like, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

Feature A2. The grasping means is configured to grasp the situation of the second action when the first action is performed at a timing before the first action is performed when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the situation of the second action when the first action is performed can be grasped at a timing before the first action is performed, and can be used for determining the content of the effect. As a result, based on the occurrence of the specific event, the player can predict and grasp the first action to be performed after that and the situation of the second action when the first action is performed. A game can be realized.

Feature A3. The effect determining means is capable of determining the content of the effect at a timing before the first action is performed when the specific event occurs. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the effect content determined based on the situation of the second action when the first action is performed is determined before the first action is performed. Therefore, based on the occurrence of a specific event, a novel game that allows the player to predict and grasp the first action to be performed after that and the situation of the second action when the first action is performed from the contents of the effect. can be realized.

Feature A4. The behavior of the game ball whose behavior has been changed by the first action can be further changed by the second action, or the behavior of the game ball whose behavior has been changed by the second action can be further changed by the first action. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the first action and the second action are more closely related. That is, the first action performed based on the occurrence of a specific event and the second action performed at a predetermined cycle are configured to change the behavior of the same game ball. Then, as described in the feature A1, since the effect of the effect contents related to the first action and the second action is performed, it is possible to suitably realize a game such as predicting the behavior of the game ball from the effect contents. It becomes possible.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is configured such that a game ball can reach the second operating means based on the occurrence of the specific event.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can reach the second action means capable of executing two actions that can change the behavior of the game ball based on the occurrence of the specific event. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which not only the first action triggered by the occurrence of the specific event but also the second action that operates with periodicity regardless of the occurrence of the specific event is associated with the effect, the second action is performed. It is possible to increase the relevance between the action side and the specific event. Therefore, it is possible to match the performance with the behavior of the game ball.

Feature A6. The grasping means grasps the situation of the second action when the first action is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, using the predetermined cycle of the second action. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the situation of the second action from a predetermined cycle at the timing of grasping by the grasping means that can occur at random.

Feature A7. Equipped with variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) that can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter or cannot be entered than in the open state,
The first operation means changes the behavior of the game ball by displacing the variable ball entry means between the open state and the closed state,
The second operation means is provided in the variable ball entry means so as to be able to change the behavior of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means,
It is characterized by comprising a means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main controller 81) capable of opening the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of the specific event. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

According to the above configuration, entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means is permitted based on the occurrence of the specific event. The first operation means changes whether or not the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means. It is provided so that the behavior of the ball can be changed. That is, when a specific event occurs, the ball is allowed to enter the variable ball entering means, and the behavior of the game ball inside the variable ball entering means is changed by the second operating means that operates periodically within the variable ball entering means. . In such a configuration, the performance contents are determined by grasping the situation of the second action when the ball is allowed to enter the variable ball entering means (when the first action is performed). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect with the effect content that takes into consideration how the behavior of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is changed by the second operation means.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A specific ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and allows the game ball to enter;
Display means (symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of patterns;
Based on the occurrence of a specific event (a ball entered into the upper working port 33 or the lower working port, or whether or not the stored information is appropriate), the display means starts the variable display of the pattern and performs a predetermined operation. variable display means (function for executing variable display control processing in the effect control device 82) capable of ending the variable display as a result of stopping the
with
The specific ball entry means includes a first passage portion (opening/closing accessory 168) through which a game ball can pass based on the occurrence of the specific event, and a game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can pass. The state is changed by the second passing portion (first distributing member 300, second distributing member 310, rotating body 201, etc.) in which switching between the first state and the second state in which the game ball cannot pass is performed at a predetermined cycle. A switching V winning opening 182a) is provided,
Based on the occurrence of the specific event, grasping means for grasping the state of the second passing portion when the passage of the game ball can occur in the first passing portion (the first distribution member in the production control device 82 a function to execute the processing for the second distribution member);
Stop pattern determination means for determining the pattern to be stopped and displayed by the variable display means as the predetermined stop result using the grasping result by the grasping means (a function of executing the pattern deciding process for the big win in the effect control device 82 )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the states of the first passage section and the second passage section are grasped based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the result of stopping the variable display of the pattern is determined. Both the first passage section and the second passage section are provided in the specific ball entry means, while the first passage section becomes passable based on the occurrence of a specific event. There is a second passing section, and the game ball that has passed through the first passing section is switched between passability/passage non-passage at a predetermined cycle. In other words, while the first passing section is triggered by a specific event, the second passing section is basically accessible at predetermined intervals. If the relationship between the first passing portion triggered by such a specific event and the second passing portion having periodicity is associated with the stop pattern in the pattern variation display performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, the game ball The behavior of the player can be livened up by effects such as variable display of patterns, and attention to the game can be increased.

Regarding the ``grasping means'', for example, ``grasping means for grasping the passage timing of the game ball through the first passing portion and the state of the second passing portion based on the occurrence of the specific event'', or ``the specific Grasping means for grasping the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passing portion and the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second passing portion derived from the predetermined period based on the occurrence of an event. It is also possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

Feature B2. A specific ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and allows the game ball to enter;
Based on the occurrence of a specific event (ball entry into the upper activation port 33 or the lower activation port, determination of whether or not stored reservation information is correct), determination of whether or not to grant a privilege to the player is performed. grant determination means (function for executing the success/failure determination process in the main control device 81);
Privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege (function for executing game state transition processing in the main controller 81) )When,
Display means (symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of patterns;
Based on the occurrence of the specific event, the display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays a predetermined stop result as a result of the grant determination by the grant determination means, and terminates the variable display. Variable display means (function for executing variable display control processing in the production control device 82) that can
with
The specific ball entry means includes a first passage portion (opening/closing accessory 168) through which a game ball can pass based on the occurrence of the specific event, and a game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can pass. The state is changed by the second passing portion (first distributing member 300, second distributing member 310, rotating body 201, etc.) in which switching between the first state and the second state in which the game ball cannot pass is performed at a predetermined cycle. A switching V winning opening 182a) is provided,
Based on the occurrence of the specific event, grasping means for grasping the state of the second passing portion when the passage of the game ball can occur in the first passing portion (the first distribution member in the production control device 82 a function to execute the processing for the second distribution member);
Stop pattern determination means for determining the pattern to be stopped and displayed by the variable display means as the predetermined stop result using the grasping result by the grasping means (a function of executing the pattern deciding process for the big win in the effect control device 82 )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the states of the first passage section and the second passage section are grasped based on the occurrence of the specific event, and the result of stopping the variable display of the pattern is determined. Both the first passage section and the second passage section are provided in the specific ball entry means, while the first passage section becomes passable based on the occurrence of a specific event. There is a second passing section, and the game ball that has passed through the first passing section is switched between passability/passage non-passage at a predetermined cycle. In other words, while the first passing section is triggered by a specific event, the second passing section is basically accessible at predetermined intervals. If the relationship between the first passing portion triggered by such a specific event and the second passing portion having periodicity is associated with the stop pattern in the pattern variation display performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, the game ball The behavior of the player can be livened up by effects such as variable display of patterns, and attention to the game can be increased.

In particular, determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege is performed based on occurrence of a specific event, and the variable display of the pattern is performed so as to produce a stop result corresponding to the result of this grant determination. In other words, the stop result of the variable display is associated with the granting determination of the privilege, and is also associated with the behavior of the game ball, such as whether or not the game ball passes through the second passage portion. In this way, by associating the awarding of the privilege and the behavior of the game ball with the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention from the respective relationships.

Regarding the ``grasping means'', for example, ``grasping means for grasping the passage timing of the game ball through the first passing portion and the state of the second passing portion based on the occurrence of the specific event'', or ``the specific Grasping means for grasping the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passing portion and the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second passing portion derived from the predetermined period based on the occurrence of an event. It is also possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

Feature B3. The grasping means, based on the occurrence of the specific event, determines the state of the second passing portion when the passage of the game ball can occur in the first passing portion than the state of the game ball passing through the first passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that it has a configuration that allows the player to grasp the game at the previous timing.

According to the above configuration, the state of the second passing portion when the game ball can pass through the first passing portion is grasped at a timing before the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the game ball is stopped. This can be used to determine the pattern to be displayed. As a result, based on the occurrence of the specific event, subsequent passage to the first passing section and the state of the second passing section when passing through the first passing section, that is, whether or not to pass through the second passing section, A novel game can be realized in which the player predicts and comprehends from the stationary picture.

Feature B4. The grasping means grasps the state of the second passing portion when the passage of the game ball can occur in the first passage based on the current state of the second passing portion and the predetermined period. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, which is a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, based on the current state of the second passing section and the predetermined period, it is possible to predict the state of the second passing section when the game ball may pass through the first passing section after that. It becomes possible. That is, since the second passage portion is periodically displaced between the passable first state and the passable second state, if the current state and the predetermined cycle are grasped, how long will it take to pass through the first passable portion? It is possible to grasp whether the state (the second state in which passage is impossible) is reached. In this way, it is possible to make a highly accurate prediction with a simple configuration. It is possible to make these contradictions less likely to occur.

Feature B5. The specific ball entry means is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter or cannot be entered than in the open state,
Displacement control means for executing displacement control between the open state and the closed state of the specific ball entry means (function for executing opening/closing processing in the main controller 81),
The first passage portion is provided at a location through which the specific ball entry means always passes when the specific ball entry means is in the open state,
Features B1 to B4, wherein the second passing portion is provided so that a game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means and passed through the first passing portion can or cannot pass. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific ball-entering means can be displaced between the open state and the closed state, and the open state allows the ball to pass through the first passage portion and the second passage portion. In other words, in a situation where the specific ball-entering means is in a closed state, passage through the first passing section and the second passing section is difficult/not to occur. By doing so, the rarity of entering the specific ball entry means, that is, passing through the first passing section and the second passing section is increased, and the pattern associated with passing through the first passing section and the second passing section is displayed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the variable display to be stopped.

Feature B6. The grasping means is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second passing portion when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, taking into consideration the control mode of the displacement control by the displacement controlling means. The game machine according to feature B5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the state of the second passing portion is grasped in consideration of the control mode of the displacement control by the displacement control means for changing the ease of entering the ball by the specific ball entering means. By doing so, for example, the case where the second passing portion becomes passable at the timing when the ball cannot enter the specific ball entering means is eliminated, and the second passing portion when passing through the first passing portion is eliminated. It becomes possible to grasp the state of the two passing parts. As a result, a contradiction is less likely to occur between the stationary pattern on the variable display means and whether or not the game ball passes through the second passing portion.

Feature B7. Based on the occurrence of the specific event, it is determined whether or not to shift the game state to a specific game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the displacement control of the specific ball entering means can be executed by the displacement control means. Transition determination means for executing
Based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means was the transition corresponding result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the transition means (in the main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
with
The variable display means is configured to end the variable display as a stop result corresponding to the transition determination result,
The grasping means, by taking into account the control mode of the displacement control during the specific game state, the state of the second passage portion when the game ball passes through the first passage portion during the specific game state The game machine according to feature B5 or feature B6, characterized in that the configuration is comprehensible.

According to the above configuration, the game state may shift to the specific game state based on the occurrence of the specific event. When the specific game state is entered, the specific ball entry means is in an open state, and entry to the specific ball entry means is permitted. In such a configuration, when a specific event occurs, the control mode of displacement control by the displacement control means during the specific game state is considered, the state of the second passing section is grasped, and the stop pattern is determined. By doing so, for example, the case where the second passing portion becomes passable at the timing when the ball cannot enter the specific ball entering means is eliminated, and the second passing portion when passing through the first passing portion is eliminated. It becomes possible to grasp the state of the two passing parts. As a result, a contradiction between the stop pattern on the variable display means and whether or not the game ball passes through the second passing portion is less likely to occur.

Feature B8. In the specific game state, unit displacement control can be executed a plurality of times to change the specific ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state.
During the period in which the passable state of the second passing portion is maintained in the predetermined period, the specific ball-entering means in the specific game state changes from the open state to the closed state and then changes to the open state. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the period is set to be longer than the waiting period until.

According to the above configuration, since the period in which the state in which the passage through the second passage section is possible is longer than the waiting period, when the waiting period and the state in which the passage through the second passage section is possible overlap, the The state in which the passing portion can be passed and the period in which the specific ball entering means is in the open state will always overlap. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to consider the waiting time during the specific game state when determining the stop pattern in consideration of the state of the second passing portion in the specific game state, and it is simply the specific game state. It is sufficient to grasp the state of the second passing portion inside, and it is possible to greatly reduce the processing load.

Feature B9. In the specific game state, a specific game in which the specific ball-entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the unit displacement control to the closed state is executed a predetermined number of times. ,
In the specific game, when the period in which the specific ball entering means is in the open state reaches a predetermined open period, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the specific ball entering means , means for controlling to end the specific game and move to the next specific game (function for executing opening and closing processing by the main control device 81),
Means for limiting the change in the period during which the specific ball entry means in the specific game is in the open state (in the opening/closing process of the main controller 81, the opening time is set to a period in which the upper limit winning number of game balls does not win) The gaming machine according to feature B7 or feature B8, characterized by comprising a function of

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific game is updated depending on whether the upper limit number of game balls enter the specific ball entry means or the open period elapses, the period in the open state does not change. , when the state of the second passing section is grasped by the grasping means, the timing at which the second passing section becomes passable and the timing at which the specific ball-entering means is in the open state (the timing at which the first passing section becomes passable) are determined. ) can be easily predicted. In other words, if such a configuration is not provided, for example, when the upper limit number of game balls enter and the specific game is updated, the period of the open state changes depending on the ball entry timing. . Then, the period of the open state during the specific game state is far from the prediction before the start of the specific game state, and it becomes difficult to predict the passage rate of the second passage section.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein the predetermined period is set to be shorter than the period during which the specific game state is executed.

According to the above configuration, it may be possible to pass through the second passing section once during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the second passing portion is not passed depending on the timing of transition to the specific game state. In this way, for example, in a gaming machine in which passage through the second passage portion is advantageous for the player, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the specific game state regardless of the transition timing.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B10, wherein the predetermined period is set to be longer than the period during which the specific game state is executed.

According to the above configuration, depending on the timing of transition to the specific game state, there are cases where the second passing section can be passed and cases where it cannot be passed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention even to the timing of transition to the specific game state, and it is possible to draw attention to the length of the variable display before the specific game state, the state of the second passing section, etc. can.

In addition, as a configuration having both feature B10 and feature B11, there are a plurality of sorting means for sorting to the second passage section, and each sorting section switches between a state in which the second passage section can be passed and a state in which the second passage section cannot be passed. It is preferable that the predetermined cycle of each sorting means is set to be longer or shorter than the period during which the specific game state is executed. Further, a plurality of types of the specific game state are set, and a specific game state longer than the predetermined cycle of the second passing portion and a specific game state shorter than the predetermined cycle may be set.

Feature B12. In the specific game state, a specific game in which the specific ball-entering means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the unit displacement control to the closed state is executed a predetermined number of times. ,
The stop pattern determining means determines whether the second passing portion is in the passable state during the first specific game in the specific game state, and the second passing portion is larger than the first time. The type of the pattern to be determined is different or the selection rate of the specific pattern among the plurality of patterns is set to be different between the case where the second passing portion is in the passable state during the specific game. The game machine according to any one of features B7 to B11, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, depending on how many times the specific game can be passed through the second passing portion, the stop pattern differs or the selection rate of the specific pattern among the plurality of patterns differs. By doing so, it is possible to associate the type of the stop pattern with the passage timing of the second passage portion. For example, in a configuration in which it is advantageous for the player to pass through the second passing section even once during the specific game state, there is a high interest in when to pass the second passing section during the specific game state. is sent. In this case, it is conceivable that the player's feelings during the specific game state differ depending on whether the second passing section is passed at an early stage or not. Specifically, if the second passing section is passed at an early stage, in the subsequent specific game, the player can fully enjoy the specific game state while being immersed in a sense of satisfaction. , it is thought that the specific game state will end if the second passing portion is not passed quickly, and the specific game state will be completed while impatiently. In this case, if information such as the timing at which the second passing section can be passed is known in advance, a game that matches the player's feelings can be realized.

Feature B13. After starting the variable display of the pattern based on the occurrence of the specific event, the variable display means continues the variable display of the pattern over a predetermined operation period, and thereafter, as the predetermined stop result, the It is for ending the variable display of the pattern,
The first passage portion is configured to allow the game ball to pass at a timing later than the predetermined operation period has elapsed after the occurrence of the specific event,
The grasping means grasps the state of the second passage portion when the game ball can pass through the first passage portion based on the occurrence of the specific event, taking into consideration the predetermined operation period. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of

According to the above configuration, the state of the second passing portion when the game ball can pass through the first passing portion is grasped, taking into consideration the predetermined operation period in which the variable display of the pattern is continued, At the start of the variable display of patterns, it is possible to determine the stop pattern. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to determine the effect pattern of the variable display of the pattern in accordance with the stop pattern, and the diversification of the effect can be achieved.

Feature B14. A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit;
with
The specific event is set as occurrence of entry of a game ball into the ball entry section or storage of the special information in the acquisition information storage means,
The variable display means sequentially performs variable display of the pattern based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
With respect to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the predetermined special information is subject to the variable display of the pattern at a timing before the variable display means becomes the target of the variable display of the pattern. Equipped with destination specifying means (function for executing processing such as step S3105 and step S3204 in the effect control device 82) that can specify the information of the predetermined operation period in the case of
The grasping means is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second passing portion in the case where the passage of the game ball can occur in the first passing portion in consideration of the identification result by the preceding identifying means. The game machine according to feature B13, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the state of the second passing section by taking into consideration the predetermined operation period in the variable display of the pattern before execution. As a result, the stop picture can be determined in advance, which can be used for, for example, a look-ahead effect. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the length of the predetermined operation period differs depending on the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means at the time of executing the variable display of the pattern, the predetermined operation specified before execution The period of time and the predetermined operating period at runtime may differ. Then, for example, the player who recognizes that the unfavorable pattern will stop due to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect or the like will try to acquire new special information so as to change the specified predetermined operation period. It is conceivable that the player who recognizes that the desired pattern will stop will follow the specified predetermined operation period. In this way, if the feature B1, in which the stop pattern is determined by the state of the second passing portion whose state is periodically switched, is used for the look-ahead effect, the player can intervene in relation to the predetermined operation period. It becomes possible to create new games that can be obtained.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle toward the game area;
Variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state; ,
variable ball entry control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing switching control between the closed state and the open state in the variable ball entry means;
Transition means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing by) and
with
The specific game state is that the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state reaches a predetermined open period, or that the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means is a predetermined number. It is possible to execute a specific game that ends based on the satisfaction of any end condition that the upper limit number has been reached, for a predetermined number of times,
A game machine, wherein the release period in the specific game is set to be longer than the firing cycle and shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established, the game ball to the variable ball entering means can enter the specific game state. The specific game state is either a period in which the variable ball entry means is open reaches a predetermined open period, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. A specific game that ends when an end condition is satisfied can be executed over a predetermined number of times. One of the termination conditions, the open period, is set to a period longer than the firing cycle and shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number. Therefore, in one specific game, although a ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means, the possibility that the one specific game will end due to the upper limit number of balls being entered is extremely low. In other words, there are overwhelmingly many cases where the specific game ends when the release period is reached. In this way, even if a plurality of end conditions are set as described above, the period during which the specific game is played can be made constant to some extent, and the specific game state in which these specific games are performed a predetermined number of times can be maintained. It is also possible to make the continuation period constant to some extent. In this way, the specific game state in the gaming machine allows the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and has a constant duration. It is possible to realize a great playability.

Feature C2. Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to the player (high A gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for shifting to the probability mode.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established during the specific game, the player is awarded a privilege. This specific condition has a different establishment probability depending on the continuation period of each specific game, and in this way, in each specific game during the specific game state, whether the specific game ends after the release period elapses. , or the end condition of the specific game can be managed on the gaming machine side to some extent, as in the feature C1, after adding the fun of the game such as whether the upper limit number of balls is entered and the specific game is finished.

In addition, as the privilege granting means, if a conventional privilege granting means that grants a predetermined number of prize balls as a privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means is separately provided, the award will be granted based on the establishment of a specific condition. It is possible to make the difference between the benefits and benefits more clear.

Feature C3. A privilege that can be given to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition (occurrence of V prize) with a different establishment probability depending on the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means during the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, further comprising granting means (a function of executing processing for transition to the high-probability mode by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established during the specific game, the player is awarded a privilege. This specific condition has a different establishment probability depending on the number of balls entered in each specific game, and in this way, in each specific game during the specific game state, the specific game ends after the release period elapses. Or, after adding the fun of the game, such as whether the specific game is ended with the maximum number of balls entered, the game machine side can manage the end condition of the specific game to some extent as in the feature C1.

Note that if the above configuration is applied to the feature C2, the privilege granting means of the feature C2 may be expressed as, for example, the first privilege granting means, and the privilege granting means having the above configuration may be expressed as the second privilege granting means. In this case, the specific conditions may also be expressed as a first specific condition and a second specific condition.

Further, if a conventional privilege granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls as a privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means is separately provided as the privilege granting means, the award will be granted based on the establishment of the specific condition. It is possible to make the difference between the benefits and benefits more clear.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition in the other specific game can be changed by changing the duration of one of the specific games.

According to the above configuration, in the specific game state in which the specific game can be played a predetermined number of times, the game content of one specific game affects the game content of the other specific game. In this way, it is not a one-time game that changes the duration of the specific game each time, but a game that sees the total specific game state and how benefits can be obtained is realized. be able to.

Feature C5. The game according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein the privilege granting means grants the privilege once even if the specific condition is satisfied multiple times in one of the specific game states. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature C1 without excessively increasing the awarding rate of the privilege in one specific game state.

Feature C6. A privilege is given to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition (occurrence of V winning) with a different establishment probability depending on the duration of the specific game or the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means during the specific game. Equipped with privilege granting means that can be granted (function for executing processing for transition to high probability mode by main control device 81),
A first notification means capable of notifying that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means before the start of the specific game state (variation display for aligning the specific symbols by the production control device 82 and ending the game round A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it has a function of executing control processing.

According to the above configuration, it is notified that the privilege will be granted before the start of the specific game state. In this way, it is not necessary to adjust the continuation period of the specific game or the number of entering balls, and it is possible to enjoy the specific game state with peace of mind. Further, if the above configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature C1, the duration of the specific game can be made constant to some extent. Prediction is possible, and inconsistencies are less likely to occur in notifications before starting. In other words, if the notification before the start of the game is different, the premise of enjoying the game with peace of mind as described above may collapse. As described above, in the configuration of feature C1, if the first notification means for performing prior notification before starting the specific game state is provided, it is possible to fully enjoy the specific game state.

Feature C7. A privilege is given to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition (occurrence of V winning) with a different establishment probability depending on the duration of the specific game or the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means during the specific game. Equipped with privilege granting means that can be granted (function for executing processing for transition to high probability mode by main control device 81),
A second notification means capable of notifying that the privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means before the start of the specific game state (variation display for arranging non-specific symbols by the production control device 82 and ending the game round A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising a function of executing control processing.

According to the above configuration, it is notified that the privilege will not be given before the specific game state is started. By doing so, it is possible to somehow change the continuation period of the specific game and the number of entered balls, and to play a game in which the specific condition is established.

Feature C8. Third notification capable of notifying that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is different during the specific game state based on the fact that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is different from that before the start of the specific game state. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a pattern correction process by the effect control device 82).

As described in feature C1, while the duration of each specific game can be fixed to some extent, the upper limit number of balls entering may occur due to some circumstances (such as the flow of game balls before the variable ball entering means). may vary in duration. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the duration changes, that is, when the probability of establishment of a specific condition changes, if it is configured to notify it, the player will of course be happy if the probability of establishment increases. However, if the establishment probability is lowered, it will be further changed (improved the establishment probability), and there will be a high interest in the manner of entering a ball during specific control. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention during the specific control state.

Feature C9. Any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the open period is set to a period longer than a period obtained by dividing a period twice the firing period from the product of the firing period and the upper limit number. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, if extra balls are entered into the variable ball entry means one by one immediately after the start and immediately before the end of the specific game, the upper limit number is reached and the specific game can be ended before the release period elapses. becomes. In this way, while basically preventing the occurrence of the upper limit number of balls, if the configuration includes variability so that the upper limit number of balls may occur depending on the situation, the active participation of the player will be encouraged. can be expected. This is because, if the period is such that the maximum number of balls cannot occur no matter how the game is played, the player will not even think of generating the maximum number of balls.

Feature C10. In the specific game state, as the open period of the specific game, a long-term open mode of a period longer than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number (16R jackpot result B 1st round to 13th round open period ), the game machine according to any one of features C1 to C9.

According to the above configuration, in the open mode for a long period of time, it is possible to enter the upper limit number of game balls, and it is possible to anticipate active participation of the players especially during that period. In addition, in a configuration in which the presence or absence of privilege provision is notified before the specific game state, if the notification favorable to the player is performed, the open period is not changed even in the long-term open mode. In addition, if an unfavorable notification is given to the player, it is thought that the player will try to change the duration of the long-term open mode. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a game, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature C11. A privilege is given to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition (occurrence of V winning) with a different establishment probability depending on the duration of the specific game or the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means during the specific game. Equipped with privilege granting means that can be granted (function for executing processing for transition to high probability mode by main control device 81),
Before the start of the specific game in the specific game state, the fourth notification means (V A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that it has a function of executing an opening effect including a win rate suggesting effect.

According to the above configuration, in the specific game state configured by a plurality of specific games, it is reported that the specific condition is likely to be established in the specific game of how many times. For example, after waiting for the establishment of the game, after that, you can play a game such as letting the ball enter as much as you want. It is also possible to play the game with peace of mind by stepping on the fact that it can be changed again after that. In this way, if a specific game in which a specific condition is likely to be established is notified, not only the specific game but also other specific games can be attracted more attention.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle toward the game area;
Variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state; ,
variable ball entry control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing switching control between the closed state and the open state in the variable ball entry means;
Transition means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing by) and
with
The specific game state is that the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state reaches a predetermined open period, or that the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means is a predetermined number. It is possible to execute a specific game that ends based on the satisfaction of any end condition that the upper limit number has been reached, for a predetermined number of times,
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the number of entering balls to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means (function of paying out prize balls by the payout control device 97) When,
In a predetermined specific game in the specific game state, when the upper limit number of game balls are not entered into the variable ball entry means, and when the upper limit number of game balls are entered, the player's Advantage setting means (function for executing processing for transition to high-probability mode in main controller 81) capable of varying subsequent advantages;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the specific game state in which the ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means. benefits are given.

Here, the specific game state is composed of a predetermined number of specific games, and in one specific game, the period in which the variable ball entry means is open reaches a predetermined open period, or a predetermined upper limit When the number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or any of the end conditions are established, the one specific game ends and the next specific game is started.

Then, if the end condition of the upper limit number among the end conditions is satisfied and the predetermined specific game is ended, it is not so (when the release period has passed and the predetermined specific game is ended). In comparison, the subsequent advantage for the player may differ. In other words, there may be cases where the more benefits given in the current specific game state are, the more advantageous the player will be after that, or the less benefits that are given, the more advantageous after that.

With such a configuration, it is possible to create a novel game in which the degree of advantage after that is changed in relation to the privilege given in the current specific game state.

Feature D2. The advantage setting means allows the upper limit number of game balls to enter in a predetermined specific game in the specific game state when the upper limit number of game balls is not entered into the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is possible to make the degree of advantage after that higher than in the case where the game is played.

According to the above configuration, the more benefits that are given in the current specific game state, the more disadvantageous it becomes after that, and the fewer the benefits that are given, the more advantageous after that. With such a configuration, it is possible to compensate for the small number of benefits given in the current specific game state by the subsequent advantage, and it is possible to make a novel game.

Feature D3. In the predetermined specific game, when a first number of game balls less than the upper limit number is entered into the variable ball entry means, and a second number of game balls less than the upper limit number and different from the first number The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the advantage is set to be the same as when the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means.

According to the above configuration, if the number of hits is less than the upper limit, the advantage does not change. Therefore, if it is not desired to change the degree of advantage, it is possible to realize a game in which the number of balls hit is just the upper limit and a privilege corresponding to the number of hits is obtained.

Feature D4. A passing portion (V winning opening 182a) through which a predetermined game ball entered by the variable ball entering means can pass;
detection means (V winning sensor 192) for detecting that a game ball passes through the passing portion;
with
The advantage level setting means is capable of setting an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage portion is detected by the detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the passing portion, the state is shifted to an advantageous state. In this case, if it is a general game machine, it may be easier for the ball to pass through the passing section if the variable ball entering means is made to enter more balls, and as a result, it is likely to be in an advantageous state, but described in the feature D1 As you can see, if the maximum number of wins is generated, the setting rate of an advantageous state can be lowered, so it is not necessarily the case that more is better, and novel game characteristics different from general game machines are realized. be able to.

Feature D5. Distributing means (first distributing member 300, second Distributing member 310, rotating body 201),
Characteristic D4, characterized in that, based on the occurrence of the upper limit number of balls entering, the probability of the distribution means distributing the game balls to the passing portion side in the subsequent specific game is reduced. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the upper limit number of hit balls occurs, the probability of allocating the ball to the passing section by the allocating means in the subsequent specific game becomes low. In this way, a reverse relationship can be established between the passing rate of the passing section and the number of entering balls.

Feature D6. In the distributing means, switching between a first mode of distributing game balls to the passing portion and a second mode of distributing game balls to a passing portion different from the passing portion is performed at a predetermined cycle. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized by comprising switching control means for controlling (a function of executing the first role product control process and the second role product control process in the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, the distribution means distributes the game balls to the passing section at a predetermined cycle. With such a configuration in which allocation is performed according to the periodic operation, the fairness of the game can be improved in the configuration in which the passage rate of the passing section (the setting rate of the advantageous state) changes due to the allocation by the allocation means as described above. Guaranteed.

Feature D7. The game machine according to feature D5 or feature D6, wherein the distribution means is installed in the variable ball entry means so as to be visible from the front of the game machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly grasp how the game balls are distributed by the distribution means. As a result, unlike a configuration in which the probability of being set to an advantageous state is simply changed by lottery or the like, it is possible to play a game such as enjoying the flow of the game ball, and also to the actual destination of the game ball. By confirming the above by the player himself/herself, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfair even if the advantageous state is not set.

Feature D8. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle toward the game area;
Variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state; ,
variable ball entry control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing switching control between the closed state and the open state in the variable ball entry means;
Specific game state transition means (main A function of executing a game state transition process by the control device 81);
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the number of entering balls to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means (function of paying out prize balls by the payout control device 97) When,
Advantageous state transition means capable of shifting the game state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player after the specific game state (function for executing processing for transition to high probability mode by main controller 81);
with
The specific game state is that the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state reaches a predetermined open period, or that the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means is a predetermined number. It is possible to execute a specific game that ends based on the satisfaction of any end condition that the upper limit number has been reached, for a predetermined number of times,
The advantageous state transition means, in a predetermined specific game in the specific game state, when the game balls of the upper limit number are not entered into the variable ball entering means, and when the game balls of the upper limit number are entered. and the probability of shifting to the advantageous state is set differently.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established, the state shifts to the specific game state in which the ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. .

Here, the specific game state is composed of a predetermined number of specific games, and in one specific game, the period in which the variable ball entry means is open reaches a predetermined open period, or a predetermined upper limit When the number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or any of the end conditions are established, the one specific game ends and the next specific game is started.

Then, if the end condition of the upper limit number among the end conditions is satisfied and the predetermined specific game is ended, it is not so (when the release period has passed and the predetermined specific game is ended). By comparison, the probability of being set to an advantageous state after a specific game state may differ. In other words, there may be cases where the more benefits given in the current specific game state are, the more advantageous the player will be after that, or the less benefits that are given, the more advantageous after that.

With such a configuration, it is possible to create a novel game in which the degree of advantage after that is changed in relation to the privilege given in the current specific game state.

Feature D9. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle toward the game area;
Variable ball entry means (accessory device 150) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state; ,
variable ball entry control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) capable of executing switching control between the closed state and the open state in the variable ball entry means;
Transition means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing by) and
with
The specific game state is that the period during which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state reaches a predetermined open period, or that the number of balls entering the variable ball-entering means is a predetermined number. It is possible to execute a specific game that ends based on the satisfaction of any end condition that the upper limit number has been reached, for a predetermined number of times,
In a predetermined specific game in the specific game state, the case where the upper limit number of game balls are not entered into the variable ball entry means is higher than the case where the upper limit number of game balls are entered. setting means (function for executing processing for transition to high probability mode in main controller 81) that can be advantageous for
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established, the game moves to the specific game state in which the ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means, and the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entering means.

Here, the specific game state is composed of a predetermined number of specific games, and in one specific game, the period in which the variable ball entry means is open reaches a predetermined open period, or a predetermined upper limit When the number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means or any of the end conditions are established, the one specific game ends and the next specific game is started.

Among the end conditions, the case where the release period has elapsed and the predetermined specific game is ended is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game is ended by entering the upper limit number of game balls. In other words, it is advantageous for the player not to allow the upper limit number of balls to be entered, and it is possible to create a novel game in which the degree of advantage is changed in relation to the number of balls entered in the specific game state.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the specific result corresponds to the transition of the game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering portion (the success/failure determination processing by the main controller 81 functions to perform) and
a transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for transitioning the game state to a specific state advantageous to the player when the determination result by the transition determination means is the specified result;
It is possible to periodically shift from before the specific state to a first position (distribution state) and a second position (non-distribution state) different from the first position, and during the specific state movable means (first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) capable of changing the degree of advantage of the game state after the specific state by displacement between the first position and the second position;
Displacement control execution means for executing displacement control between the first position and the second position of the movable means (function for executing the first role object control process and the second role object control process by the main control device 81) When,
Grasping means (first role product counter YK1, second role product counter YK2) for grasping the displacement state of the movable means;
Determination means capable of determining the length of the predetermined period until the specific state starts based on the grasping result of the grasping means (setting processing of the fluctuation display time for the big hit by the main controller 81, function to execute the setting process of the opening period),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the advantage after the specific state changes due to the periodic displacement of the movable means, the advantage after the specific state changes depending on the state of the movable means at the timing of transition to the specific state. obtain. Therefore, if the length of the predetermined period until the start of the specific state is determined based on the operation status of the movable means, the advantage after the specific state is adjusted according to the length of the predetermined period. becomes possible. Therefore, in a configuration in which fairness in appearance is ensured in which the advantage is determined by the movable means that periodically displaces, the advantage can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side.

Feature E2. The movable means can guide the game ball to the first passing portion (V winning opening 182a) by being arranged at the first position, can be guided to a second passage portion (outlet 182b) different from the first passage portion,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the game ball passing through the first passing portion is configured such that the degree of advantage after the specific state becomes advantageous.

According to the above configuration, the operation of the movable means and the destination of the game ball are associated with each other, and a game in which the game ball flows down can be played during the specific state. In this way, while enjoying the specific state, the destination of the game ball can be managed according to the length of the predetermined period, so it is possible to suppress an extreme rise or collapse of the ball output rate.

Feature E3. Based on the transition determination by the transition determining means, the effect for the game cycle is started by a predetermined display means, and the effect for the game cycle is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display means as one game round is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the determination means is capable of determining, as the predetermined period, a period during which the game cycle is performed before the transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, by adjusting the length of the execution period of the game cycle, it is possible to change the degree of advantage after the subsequent specific state. Here, the execution period of a game round is generally long or short, and even if the execution period changes, the player is unlikely to feel discomfort. Therefore, by adjusting such a variable execution period, it becomes possible to manage the advantage without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Feature E4. The game according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the determining means is capable of determining a length of an opening period before the start of the specific state as the predetermined period. machine.

According to the above configuration, the advantage after the specific state can be changed by adjusting the length of the opening period. While the opening period is before the start of the specific state, it can be said that the opening period is the period before the state becomes advantageous for the player. Therefore, even if the length of the opening period changes, the advantage of the specific state itself does not change, so the game machine side manages the advantage after the specific state without giving the player the impression of loss. be able to.

Feature E5. The determining means can determine the length of the predetermined period so that the movable means that periodically displaces is in a predetermined state based on the grasping result of the grasping means. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the state before the specific state of the movable means that is periodically displaced can be set to the predetermined state. The predetermined state is, for example, an initial state or a state in which a predetermined period of time has passed since the displacement to the first position or the second position. It becomes possible to make the displacement pattern of the means constant.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a prize winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Based on the special information stored in the information storage means, transition determination means for executing transition determination whether or not to shift the game state from the normal state to the specific state function) and
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific state, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state to the specific state (by the main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing),
Setting means capable of setting different degrees of advantage after the specific state according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when performing a game in which the game state is shifted to the specific state based on the acquired special information, the degree of advantage of the game state after the specified state differs according to the number of acquired special information. In other words, whether or not to transition to the specific state is determined based on the transition determination of one piece of special information, while the degree of advantage after the specific state is set based on the number of special information. For example, in a gaming machine that merely determines whether or not to shift to a specific state, a player who has grasped that the acquired special information will shift to a specific state by some kind of notification or the like cannot obtain further special information. It is thought that they do not show much interest in acquisition. As a result, the player will be in a so-called waiting state after obtaining the special information (after understanding that the state will shift to the specific state) until the state shifts to the specific state, and the player may lose interest in the game. do not have. Therefore, with the above configuration, even if it is known that the state will shift to a specific state by some kind of notification or the like, it is possible to create the significance of acquiring further special information after that, and the occurrence of waiting time can be reduced. It is possible to cancel. In addition, in a gaming machine in which a player can obtain a privilege in a specific state, it is necessary to consider how special information can be obtained even in a specific state, rather than a one-sided game in which the player obtains a privilege in the specific state. Games can be added, contributing to the diversification of games. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F2. The setting means is means for further changing and setting the set advantage when the special information is acquired by the information acquiring means at a timing after setting the advantage. (a function of executing a pattern announcement process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, for example, when the player grasps the advantage after the specific state set by the setting means, if the advantage is unfavorable for the player, it can be changed. If there is, it can be a motivation to acquire further special information.

Feature F3. The game according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the setting means sets an advantage according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means before the transition to the specific state. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably eliminate the waiting time before transition to the specific state. In addition, in this way, it is possible to notify whether or not to shift to the specific state and the degree of advantage after the specific state before the shift to the specific state, so that the player can enjoy the specific state with peace of mind. .

Feature F4. With regard to the predetermined special information that triggers the transition to the specific state, the waiting period from the acquisition of the predetermined special information to the transition to the specific state based on the predetermined special information is the predetermined special state. A configuration that can change depending on the special information acquired after the information is acquired,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the advantage according to the length of the waiting period.

According to the above configuration, if the special information is further acquired after the acquisition of the predetermined special information that triggers the transition to the specific state, there is no so-called waiting time until the transition to the specific state based on the predetermined special information. The length of the waiting period may vary. Since the advantage is set according to the length of the waiting period, the so-called waiting period can be effectively used to improve the degree of attention.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the setting means includes means for setting the advantage so that the longer the waiting period is, the more advantageous the player is.

According to the above configuration, the longer the waiting time until transition to the specific state, the more advantageous the player will be after the specific state. By doing so, it is possible to preferably eliminate the frustration of waiting time.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F4 or feature F5, wherein the setting means includes means capable of setting the advantage so that a shorter waiting period is advantageous to the player. .

According to the above configuration, the shorter the waiting time until transition to the specific state, the more advantageous the player will be after the specific state. In this way, it is possible to provide a game property that is full of undulations of the ball, such that the faster the transition to the specific state, the higher the advantage after that.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the standby period can be shortened as the number of special information increases.

According to the above configuration, not only is the short waiting time more advantageous, but it is also possible to realize a game in which special information is newly acquired in order to shorten the waiting time.

Feature F8. The setting means sets the advantage so that the longer the waiting period is advantageous to the player when the first event occurs, and the second event different from the first event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F7, wherein the advantage is set so that the shorter the standby period is advantageous to the player when the standby period is set.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where a longer waiting period is more advantageous, and there are cases where a shorter waiting period is more advantageous. It is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the events is occurring, and to greatly diversify the game.

Feature F9. a first acquisition condition and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition are set as the acquisition condition;
The shift determination means makes the special information acquired when the first acquisition condition is satisfied more than the special information acquired when the second acquisition condition is satisfied prior to the first acquisition condition. The game machine according to any one of features F4 to F8, further comprising priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81) that preferentially performs the transition determination.

According to the above configuration, the special information acquired based on the fulfillment of the first acquisition condition is prioritized over the special information acquired prior to the fulfillment of the second acquisition condition in the transition determination. In this way, if the special information interrupt can occur later, the time from acquisition of the predetermined special information that triggers the transition to the specific state to the transition to the specific state based on the special information. The waiting period can vary. In other words, if the predetermined special information is acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, if the first acquisition condition is established during the subsequent waiting period, an interruption of the special information occurs and the waiting period changes. can.

Feature F10. The transition determination for the special information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition is more advantageous to the player than the transition determination for the special information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that determination can be made.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further satisfy the first acquisition condition to generate an interrupt of the special information in a situation where the transition to the specific state is known.

Feature F11. In a situation in which the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means for the special information, the greater the number of the special information stored in the information storage means, the more the transition determination for the special information for which the transition determination is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F10, characterized by comprising means capable of shortening the period required for notifying the result of (1).

According to the above configuration, the greater the number of pieces of special information at the time of transition determination, the shorter the period for notifying the result of transition determination. By using such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting period for the predetermined special information after obtaining the predetermined special information. Therefore, the effect of the feature F4 can be obtained with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) for shooting a game ball toward a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Transition determination means for executing transition determination as to whether or not to shift the game state to a specific state based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion (function for executing win/fail lottery processing by the main controller 81) When,
Game state transition means (main controller 81) for transitioning the game state to the specific state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being a transition correspondence result corresponding to transition to the specific state function to execute game state transition processing by) and
A setting means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the high probability mode by the main controller 81) for setting the game state after the specific state to an advantageous state (high probability mode) that is advantageous to the player;
with
The setting means
A first means for setting before transition to the specific state (function for executing data setting processing and variable display time setting processing by the main controller 81);
a second means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the main controller 81) set during the specific state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a game in which it is determined whether or not to shift the game state to the specific state when the game ball enters the ball entry portion, the game state after the specific state is advantageous for the player. state may shift. Therefore, the player first plays the game by paying attention to the transition to the specific state, and expects to be set to the advantageous state after the transition to the specific state. As a gaming machine that performs such a game, there is known a gaming machine that can shift to a variable probability state in which the lottery probability increases after a big win, for example. The lottery is also performed at the same time, and it is common to have a configuration in which it is possible to shift to a variable probability state by passing a predetermined passing portion (so-called V zone) during a big hit. In the former case, whether or not to shift to the variable probability state is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery, so that the player can quickly know that the state will shift to the variable probability state, and plays the game while feeling a sense of superiority. However, there is a possibility that the game during the jackpot will become monotonous. On the other hand, in the latter case, whether or not to shift to the probability variable state depends on the game during the jackpot, so while the attention during the jackpot is increased, at the time of the jackpot or the big deal, whether to shift to the probability variable state or not It is not clear whether it is, and it is difficult to create a difference in performance between the jackpot that does not shift to the variable probability state and the jackpot that shifts to the variable probability state, and there is a possibility that the performance at the time of the jackpot will become monotonous. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the timing to set to shift to the advantageous state occurs before the specific state and during the specific state. Setting to an advantageous state can be preferably implemented.

Feature G2. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
Information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
with
The transition determination means sequentially executes the transition determination for the special information stored in the information storage means,
The first means, with respect to the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, determines whether the special information is in the specific state based on the special information at a timing prior to the transition determination by the transition determination means. It is characterized by having means (function of executing processing for performing symbol notice by main control device 81) that can be set to be in the advantageous state after the specific state in the case of shifting to The game machine according to feature G1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the entering ball portion, and the transition determination is sequentially performed for the special information, the transition determination is performed before the transition determination. When transitioning to a specific state, it may be set to become an advantageous state after the specific state. In this way, it is possible to attract attention even before the big win lottery, unlike the conventional game machine that draws a lottery for transition to the variable probability state together with the big win lottery. As a result, it is possible to prepare points that make players interested according to the progress of the game, such as setting to an advantageous state by the first means, transition determination, specific state, setting to the advantageous state in the specific state by the second means, and the progress of the game. It is possible to eliminate the so-called waiting time and maintain the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G3. According to the timing at which the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means, the probability of being set to the advantageous state after the specific state when transitioning to the specific state based on the acquired special information is different. can be,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the first means and the second means are capable of changing the probability of being set to the advantageous state at the acquired timing.

According to the above configuration, the probability of being set to an advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which the special information is acquired, so the timing of entering the ball-entering section from which the special information is acquired is of great interest. . In this way, the ball entering the ball entering section is not only the trigger for determining the transition to the specific state, but also the ball entering timing becomes an important factor, concentrating the interest on the ball entering the ball entering section. to increase attention. In this case, if the timing of entering the ball is favorable for the player, that is, the timing is likely to be set in an advantageous state, it is sufficient, but if the timing is unfavorable, then the enjoyment of the player after that may be reduced. There is a possibility that it will be lost. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the probability of being set to an advantageous state by the first means or the second means can be changed as in the above configuration, even if the timing of entering the ball is not favorable to the player, It is possible to make the player expect something favorable, and to keep the player's interest in the game from being interrupted.

Feature G4. Advantageous determination means for determining whether or not to shift the game state after the specific state to the advantageous state (determines whether or not a V prize has occurred in the processing for transition to the high probability mode by the main controller 81 function to execute processing to
Advantageous transition capable of shifting the game state after the specific state to the advantageous state based on the fact that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a specific result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state. means (function for executing transition processing when main controller 81 terminates opening/closing execution mode);
with
The advantageous determination has a configuration in which the probability of obtaining the specific result differs depending on the timing at which the advantageous determination is made,
Any of the features G1 to G3, wherein the first means and the second means are configured to set the timing at which the advantageous determination is performed and to set the transition to the advantageous state after the specific state. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is determined by the advantageous determination, and the probability of obtaining the specific result of shifting to the advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which the advantageous determination is performed. The second means is to set the timing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state. In this way, the probability itself of obtaining a specific result in the advantageous determination can be made constant for the gaming machine, so it is possible to secure the fairness and transparency of the game.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the advantage determination means executes the advantage determination during the specific state.

If the advantageous determination is made during the specific state as in the above configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention during the specific state. Since this determination timing is set before the specific state and during the specific state as described above, the influence of the determination timing set before the specific state (set by the first means) is during the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the attention of related events such as the setting of the decision timing and the advantageous decision.

Feature G6. The first means and the second means are capable of setting the advantageous state after the specific state by setting the length of the predetermined period until the advantageous determination is made. The gaming machine according to feature G4 or feature G5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the probability of obtaining a specific result differs depending on the timing at which the advantageous determination is made. For example, it is possible to adjust by shifting the timing of the advantageous determination. This makes it possible to set the advantageous state with a simple configuration such as setting the length of the period.

Feature G7. The predetermined period set by the first means exists until the transition to the specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the predetermined period set by the second means exists during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined period set by the first means and the predetermined period set by the second means are in different period bands, and duplication of processes is less likely to occur. Specifically, if there is a period band that overlaps with each predetermined period, the period set by one will be set again by the other, and there is a possibility that processing will be wasted. be.

Feature G8. Provided in the game area, a specific ball entry part (upper operation opening 33, lower operation opening 34, accessory device 150) into which a game ball can enter,
The game according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein the first means and the second means are configured to perform the setting based on the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section. machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball is shot based on the player's shooting operation, the advantageous state is set by the first means and the second means based on the ball entering the specific ball entering portion. In this way, it becomes possible for the player to participate in the setting of the advantageous state, and by encouraging participation in the game, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G9. A first specific ball-entering section and a second specific ball-entering section are provided in the game area as the specific ball-entering section,
The first means performs the setting based on the entry of the game ball into the first specific ball entry part, and the second means is the entry of the game ball into the second specific ball entry part. The gaming machine according to feature G8, characterized in that it is configured to perform settings.

According to the above configuration, the ball entering different ball-entering sections such as the first specific ball-entering section and the second specific ball-entering section is used as a trigger for setting the advantageous state of the first means and the second means. It is possible to allow the player to grasp by more clearly distinguishing by which means the advantageous state is set. Also, the first means is set before the specific state, and the second means is set during the specific state. By arranging the first specific ball-entering part and the second specific ball-entering part at positions corresponding to the launch destinations, it is possible to suitably cope with gaming machines with different launch destinations depending on the game state.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PE) can enter,
First determination means for executing a first determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry section functions to perform) and
a first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) that grants the first privilege to the player based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means;
operation means (first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) that performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined cycle;
grasping means for grasping the operation status of the operation means when the first judgment is made by the first judgment means;
Second determination means (V a function to execute the feasibility determination process);
Second privilege granting means for granting the second privilege based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means (a function of executing processing for transition to the high probability mode by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entering section, it is possible to receive the first determination as to whether or not the first privilege can be obtained, and when the first determination is performed A second determination is made as to whether or not the second privilege is given depending on the operation status of the operating means. By doing so, not only is the ball entered into the starting ball entry portion and the first judgment is received, but the timing of receiving the first judgment is added to the elements of the game, thereby diversifying the game. Since whether or not the second privilege is given is determined by the operation status of the operation means, the player's attention is focused not only on the starting ball-entering section but also on the operation means. Diversification of games is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that the grasping means may be expressed as "grasping the operation status by the operation means at the timing when the first determination is made by the first determination means". In addition, in addition to the configuration provided with a notification means for notifying the result of the first determination, with respect to the grasping means, "when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is notified by the notification means, the It may be expressed as "understanding the operation status by the operation means", or "the operation status by the operation means at the timing when the notification means notifies the result of the first determination by the first determination means". It can be expressed as "understand".

Feature H2. The second privilege granting means can grant the second privilege when the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a result corresponding to granting the first privilege. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the result of the first determination has priority over the second determination. In other words, even if the result of the second judgment is that it is possible to grant the second privilege, if the result of the first judgment is not a result corresponding to granting the first privilege, the second privilege is granted. not. In this way, by giving priority to the randomly occurring first determination, it is possible to suppress the act of obtaining the second benefit from the operation status of the operation means that operates periodically.

Feature H3. First notification means (performance control device 82) capable of executing notification of the result of the first determination by the first determination means by predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) Execution of variable display control processing function) and
When the result of the first determination is notified by the first notification means, notification corresponding to the result of the second determination by the second determination means is performed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. A second notification means (a function of executing a pattern determination process for a big hit by the effect control device 82),
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the player can know the result of the second determination together with the result of the first determination. In this way, it is possible to enhance the impression that the first determination and the second determination having different determination triggers are related to each other.

Feature H4. The second privilege provision means determines that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a result corresponding to the provision of the second privilege, and that a predetermined provision condition has been established thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the second privilege is awarded based on.

According to the above configuration, the second privilege is not given only by the result of the second judgment by the second judgment means, i.e., the operation state of the operation means when the first judgment is made, and the granting condition is satisfied after that. need arises. In this way, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally trying to obtain the second privilege depending on the operating state of the operating means.

Feature H5. The action means is configured to change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area by the predetermined action,
A passage portion (V winning opening 182a) provided in an area where a game ball whose behavior has changed due to the operation means can reach, and through which the game ball can pass,
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the granting condition is established when a game ball passes through the passing portion.

According to the above configuration, the result of the second determination performed according to the operation status of the operation means when the first determination is performed is the result corresponding to the provision of the second privilege, and after that, the behavior is performed by the operation means When the game ball with the change of passes through the passing part and the granting condition is established, the second privilege is granted. That is, in the structure which provides a 2nd privilege through two-stage determination of the 2nd determination -> success or failure of grant conditions, any determination is related with an operation|movement means. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at periodic actions while actively playing games that are visually enjoyable, such as the behavior of the game ball and the actions of the action means.

Feature H6. The second privilege granting means determines that the result of the second determination by the second determination means corresponds to granting the second privilege if the granting condition is not satisfied within a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or feature H5, characterized in that the second privilege is not given even if the second privilege is given.

According to the above configuration, by providing a limited period for the success or failure of the granting condition for the second privilege, the game is not delayed, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to whether the granting condition is met.

Feature H7. As the game state, an advantageous state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state is set.
The first privilege providing means sets the game state to the advantageous state as the first privilege,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H6, wherein the condition for granting the second privilege can be established during the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible for the granting condition to be fulfilled during an advantageous state in which the degree of attention is improved in the first place, which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the success or failure of the granting condition is overlooked. can do.

Feature H8. A first advantageous state and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set as the advantageous state,
The first privilege granting means sets the game state to the first advantageous state as the first privilege,
The condition for granting the second privilege can be established during the first advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the second privilege providing means sets an advantageous state after the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state as the second privilege.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the first advantageous state is made as the first privilege, and the condition for granting whether or not the second privilege is granted during the first advantageous state is met, the first advantageous state is followed by the second privilege. 2 Move to an advantageous state. That is, the game during the first advantageous state determines whether or not the state advantageous to the player continues (shifts to the second advantageous state), so that the degree of attention during the first advantageous state can be further increased. It becomes possible.

Feature H9. Variable ball entry means (accessory device) provided in the game area and displaceable between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter or cannot be entered than in the open state 150),
The first advantageous state is a state in which the variable ball entry means can be in the open state,
The gaming machine according to feature H8, wherein the granting condition is a configuration that can be established by the behavior of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means when the first advantageous state is reached. And, since the provision condition is established by the behavior of the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, in the first advantageous state, not only the game of simply entering the ball into the variable ball entering means is performed calmly, It is also possible to make the player pay attention to the behavior of the game ball after it is entered. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A ball entry part (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34) provided in a game area (game area PE) where a game ball can flow down and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Operation means (opening/closing accessory 168, first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) provided in the game area and capable of executing a predetermined action that changes the behavior of the game ball;
In a gaming machine comprising
It comprises a first control means (main control device 81) and a second control means (effect control device 82) that execute predetermined control,
The first control means is
Judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the entry of the ball into the ball entering section (function for executing a winning judgment process by the main controller 81);
Based on the judgment by the judgment means, the change display is executed by the first notification means (main display unit 43), and the change display on the first notification means is the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment. A first change display means (a function of executing a game round control process by the main control device 81) for ending the
When the change display is performed by the first change display means, a first determination means for determining the content of the change display (a function of executing the processing of steps S708 and S710 by the main controller 81);
means for outputting change display information (variation command, type command) including the content of the change display to the second control means (function for executing the process of step S713 by the main control device 81);
with
The second control means is
Based on the judgment by the judgment means, the second notification means (symbol display device 42) executes the change display, and the change display in the second notification means is the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment. A second change display means (a function of executing a change display control device process by the effect control device 82) that ends the
A second determining means (for a big win by the production control device 82) capable of determining the contents of the changing display in the second reporting means based on the changing display information and the situation of the predetermined operation by the operating means. function to execute the pattern determination process),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion, a predetermined determination is made, and a change display corresponding to the determination result is performed by the first notification means and performed by the second notification means. will be In this case, the first notification means and the second notification means are controlled by different main control means. by a second control means which receives change indication information from.

In such a configuration, the second notification means determines the contents of the change display based on the change display information from the first control means and the operation status of the operation means that performs the predetermined operation, and executes the change display. . As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of notification means are used to perform notification, it is possible to make the contents consistent and differ in the degree of fulfillment.

For example, it is preferable for a game hall manager or the like who monitors whether a proper game is being played based on the notification of the determination result so that the determination result can be clearly grasped. On the other hand, players who want to enjoy the game including the content of the effects are not satisfied with mere notification of the determination result, and desire various effects. Here, as a device to diversify the effects, it is conceivable to incorporate the operation means into part of the effects. The operation means is operated depending on the determination result. On the other hand, in the above configuration, the contents of the change display are determined in consideration of the operating conditions of the operating means. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operating means is treated not as an additive to the change display but as an active one. By doing so, even the operation of the operation means when the change display is performed can be made to be noticed, and the degree of fulfillment of the change display on the second notification means side can be dramatically improved. . Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention in the second notification means while matching the contents of the first notification means and the second notification means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the second determination means can determine the notification result when the change display by the second notification means is terminated.

According to the above configuration, the notification result of the change display by the second notification means is determined based on the change display information from the first control means and the operation status of the operation means. That is, in the configuration in which the result of the determination means is notified by the notification result of the change display of the first notification means or the second notification means, the operation status of the operation means is added to the notification result. As a result, it is possible for the player to feel as if the determination based on the ball entering the ball entering portion is made in consideration of the operation mode of the operation means, and the game enjoys the flow down of the game ball. It is possible to create a novel game by combining it with a game in which the operation of the operating means is enjoyed.

Feature I3. Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a result (jackpot result) corresponding to awarding the first privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player, the first privilege can be awarded to the player. privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by main control device 81);
A passing portion (V winning opening 182a) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass;
A second privilege giving means (by the main controller 81) that can give a second privilege (high probability mode) different from the first privilege to the player based on the game ball passing through the passage part function to execute processing for transition to high-probability mode),
with
According to the feature I1 or feature I2, the operation means is provided so that the passing rate of the passing portion can be changed by changing the behavior of the game ball due to the predetermined action. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first notification means notifies the determination result by the determination means, that is, whether or not the first privilege is granted, and the second notification means indicates whether or not the first privilege is granted. In addition, the content related to whether or not the second privilege is given is reported. In other words, the first notification means and the second notification means have the same notification content regarding the provision of the first privilege, and only the second notification device reports the content regarding the provision of the second privilege. and Here, in a configuration in which whether or not a privilege is granted changes depending on the behavior of the game ball, unlike the lottery based on numerical information, irregularities due to the behavior of the game ball may occur. A player can enjoy whether or not a privilege is granted, including occurrence. However, due to the occurrence of such irregularity, it is often difficult to notify whether or not the privilege will be granted. Therefore, with respect to the first notification means, by notifying the content of the first privilege grant on the side that is not related to the behavior of the game ball, the occurrence of inconsistency between the presence or absence of the privilege grant and the notification content can be avoided. becomes possible.

Feature I4. The second determining means grasps whether or not it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the passing portion after that from the state of the predetermined operation of the operating means, and the The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine the content of the change display.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the game ball passes through the passing portion can be notified first rather than afterward. As a result, the player can grasp that the game ball will pass through the passing section after that by the notification, and can recognize that the second privilege will be granted before it is granted. Become.

Feature I5. The operation means performs the predetermined operation at a predetermined cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the second determining means is capable of determining the content of the change display based on the predetermined period and the operating state.

As in the above configuration, if the operation means is configured to perform periodic operation, it becomes possible to easily predict the subsequent situation from the periodic operation.

Feature I6. The first control means includes grasping means (accessory counters YK1 and YK2) for grasping the state of the predetermined operation of the operating means;
Means (main controller 81 a function to execute the processing of steps S1319 and S1411 by
with
The method according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the second determining means is capable of determining the content of the change display based on the change display information and the operation status information. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary for the second control means to grasp the operation status of the operation means. Here, from the viewpoint of efficiently suppressing fraudulent acts on the control means, it is preferable to integrate the configuration related to the player's profit, such as the determination means, into one control means. In this regard, the first control means having the determination means should preferably have the configuration for controlling the action means that causes the behavior of the game ball to change, because it is also related to the profit of the game. Therefore, if the first control means is configured to grasp the operation status of the operation means as in the above configuration, the configuration for controlling the operation of the operation means and the configuration for grasping the operation status are combined into one control means. will be aggregated. If the content is output to the side of the second control means, the state of the operation can be grasped without performing the operation control in the second control means, and the content of the change display can be suitably determined. can be done.

Feature I7. As the operating means,
A first operating means capable of executing a predetermined first action that can change the behavior of the game ball when a specific event (winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34) occurs as the game progresses. (Opening and closing accessory 168) and
second action means (first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) capable of executing a predetermined second action that can change the behavior of the game ball at a predetermined cycle;
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the operating conditions of the first operating means that operates when a specific event that can occur randomly as the game progresses and the second operating means that operates at predetermined intervals are taken into consideration, The content of the change display by the second notification means is determined. By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of change display on the side of the second notification means and increase the degree of attention on the side of the second notification means.

In addition, for example, the above configuration is such that "the second determination means grasps the situation of the second action when the first action is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and determines the content of the change display. can be determined", "The second determination means grasps the execution timing of the first action and the operation status of the second action based on the occurrence of the specific event, and determines the content of the change display. can be determined", "The second determining means grasps the execution timing of the first action and the situation of the second action derived from the predetermined period based on the occurrence of the specific event, It is possible to determine the content of the change display", "The second determination means grasps the first action and the second action based on the occurrence of the specific event, and determines the content of the change display The effect can be exhibited more remarkably by restricting such as "can be done".

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in the respective inventions of each feature group A to I described above may be applied to each invention of each feature group A to I. It may be applied to each invention of Group I. Moreover, all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to I can be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24... Game board, 33... Upper operation opening, 34... Lower operation opening, 41... Symbol display device, 60... Launch handle, 81... Main control device, 82... Production control device, 150... Accessory device , 168... Opening and closing accessories 182a... V winning opening 182b... Exiting opening 192... V winning sensor 193... Losing sensor 300... First distribution member 300a... First distribution drive section 310... Third 2 distribution member, 310a... 2nd distribution drive section.

Claims (1)

A ball entry means provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area;
It is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state in which a game ball is easy to enter or can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state or cannot be entered. variable entrance means;
updating means capable of updating predetermined numerical information at predetermined intervals;
an operation means capable of executing a predetermined operation that changes the behavior of a predetermined game ball entered by the variable ball entry means;
with
The updating means is configured to start updating at a predetermined timing after the game machine is powered on,
When the predetermined numerical information is specific numerical information, the operation means can be operated in a specific manner as the predetermined operation,
The operation means operates in the specific mode, which is advantageous for the player,
Equipped with first control means and second control means for executing predetermined control,
The first control means is
determining means for performing a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, variable ball entry control is executed to switch the game state from the second state to the first state and then to the second state. a transition means for transitioning to a specific state;
A first change for executing a change display by a first notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and ending the change display by the first notification means as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. display means;
a first determination means for determining the content of the change display when the change display is performed by the first change display means;
means for outputting change display information including content of the change display to the second control means;
with
The second control means is
A second change for executing a change display by the second notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and ending the change display by the second notification means as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. display means;
specific result information corresponding to a specific result specified based on the predetermined numerical information before the state of the predetermined operation by the operating means in the specific state is shifted to the specific state; and the change display information. and a second determining means capable of determining the content of the change display in the second reporting means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images